EMPIRES IN ARMS

MODIFIED RULES FOR OUR GAME

Latest Revision 29 Dec 2013

1.0 INTRODUCTION / COMPONENTS

EMPIRES IN ARMS is a strategic and diplomatic game for up

to 7 players that covers the Napoleonic wars from 1805 until 1815.
The military counters in the game generally represent corps and
fleets, with each army factor being equivalent to roughly 1000
to2000 men and each "ship" equivalent to 1 ship of the line or a
number of smaller ships of approximately equal force.

[ 1.1 ] THE MAP: The game is played on two maps which, when
placed together, show Europe and parts of Asia and North Africa.
It is divided into "areas" by colored lines for the purpose of
regulating movement. Some of these lines have additional
functions-as national or provincial borders and/or as rivers. These
lines and all other mapboard terrain features are identified on the
TERRAIN EFFECTS CHART printed in the northwest corner of
the combined mapboard.
1.1.1 WEST PRUSSIA: Add "(P)" after "West Prussia", i.e. West
Prussia is a possible Polish province. DB & JJ
1.1.2 OFEN: For purposes of the 4.4 Victory Conditions Chart
only, Ofen is an Austrian national capital city (i.e. a victorious
power may not select Hungary for cession unless all other Austrian
provinces are already ceded). For purposes of 8.2.1.1 (Money
Collection by Taxation) and all other rules, Ofen remains a
provincial capital. MLB

[ 1.2 ] THE COUNTERS: There are eight sets of counters-one

for each of the major powers and one for the minor neutrals. All
counters have a distinctive background color-white for Austria,
green for Russia, light green for Turkey, blue for Prussia, light
blue for France, red for Great Britain, yellow for Spain and gray
for the neutrals. The motifs on the counters are decorative and
functional, distinguishing infantry and cavalry corps, fleets, and
depots and also provide information necessary for the play of the
game. There are two sizes of counters provided in the game-the
large counters for corps, fleets and depots, and the small counters
for garrisons and off-map counters, guerrillas, cossacks and
freikorps, control flags, leaders and assorted markers. The
information provided on each counter is shown as follows:

1.2.1 LEADER COUNTER CHANGES:

1.2.1.1 WELLINGTON: The British leader Wellington has a
strategic rating of 4, not 5 as printed on the counter. MLB

[ 1.3 ] THE RULES: The rules are written in sequence of play

order. As rules sections are read, it is helpful to pull out and
examine the component or chart being discussed while reading
the rule. Some rules relate only to the campaign games and are
not required for play of the scenarios. Rules used only for the

1
campaign games are denoted by an asterisk (*) in the rule heading.
An asterisk with any rule heading indicates that all of that rule and
all of its subsidiary rules are ignored for play of the scenarios.
Players should play at least a scenario or two to familiarize
themselves with the game's combat and supply mechanics before
trying a campaign game. A table of contents is provided to help
find and reference rules during the play of a game.
[ 1.4 ] THE GAME CARD: The Game Card contains the most
commonly used charts and tables for easy reference during a game.
Two copies are included.
1.4.1 Missing Minors: The Minor Countries Chart omitted a line
for Finland and Norway. If separated from their major districts,
treat use the National Modifiers on the MINOR COUNTRIES
CHART of Sweden for Finland and Denmark for Norway. JJ
[ 1.5 ] THE NATIONAL CARDS: The seven National Cards for
the major powers have two sides, and players may use either side
in a game, as desired. Side one is used with small garrison/strength
counters to record the strengths of corps and fleets and with
economic manipulation markers for economic manipulation (see
option 12.5) and is recommended for use with the scenarios. Side
2.0 GAME SETUP
After players decide which scenario or campaign game to play,
the following must be done to prepare for play.
[ 2.1 ] SELECTION OF MAJOR POWERS: For the scenarios,
players may utilize any preferred method to select sides. For the
campaign games we recommend the procedure covered in 14.2.
[ 2.2 ] SCENARIO SETUP: The setup for each scenario is
described in the scenario rules (see 13.0), and the setup for each
campaign game is found in the campaign game rules (see 14.0).
These contain needed specific setup information not found here.
[ 2.3 ] MAPBOARD AND GAMING AREA SETUP: The two
maps should be counter folded to lay flat and placed together so
that they match up. EMPIRES RV ARMS is a large game that
requires a large area in which to play, and any table selected
should be large enough not only to hold the maps but also to
provide room for the various cards to be placed near and around
the maps.
[ 2.4 ] COUNTER SETUP: This is covered in more detail in
13.0 and 14.0.
2.4.1 MAPBOARD COUNTERS: The forces on the map are
represented by various counters. The strengths of garrisons (use
garrison/strength counters), Cossacks, freikorps and guerrillas are
directly shown by the factor on the actual counter. These factors
are totally interchangeable within their type (e.g., a 5 factor
militia garrison counter may be exchanged for a 2 factor plus a 3
factor militia counter, etc.). Each cossack or freikorps counter is
worth exactly one factor. The strengths of corps and fleet counters
are recorded off the map.
2.4.2 USING THE NATIONAL CARDS: The maximum
strengths of corps and fleets are shown on the appropriate
National Cards (one card per major power, and one for all of the
minor countries). The corps and fleet counters when face-up on
the map only show their general type and movement allowance.
Which corps each counter represents is shown on the back of the
counter and may be examined by only the owning player, except
when its identity must be revealed to other players (e.g., during a
combat-see 7.5.2.6.3). The designation of each fleet (and its
movement allowance) is shown on the front of the counter and so
its designation and exact strength should always be known to all
players.
2.4.2.1 USING SIDE ONE OF THE NATIONAL CARDS:
Side one of each National Card contains spaces for indicating the
2
two must be copied, with pencils and erasers used to record and
modify necessary information and is recommended for use with
the campaign games. The card for the minor countries also has
two sides. Side one is used to record the strengths of corps and
fleets the same as the major power cards' side one, while side
two has forms for use with option 12.6 and must be copied
(numerous copies needed) and cut up for use. If side two of the
major power's national cards are used side one of the Minor
Country National Card is not needed as strengths can be
recorded on the major powers' copies of side two.
[ 1.6 ] THE STATUS CARD: This card is used with small
counters to record political status, victory points and the game
date. The back contains additional forms to be copied and cut up
for use with option 12.6.
[ 1.7 ] THE DICE: Two 6-sided dice are included.
[ 1.8 ] OTHER: Pencils and scratch paper (not included) are
useful.
strength of every corps and fleet of that major power or of the
minor countries.
2.4.2.1.1 Showing Strengths: The number in each box indicates
the maximum number of ships or army factors of that type that
that corps or fleet may contain. The current strength of a corps is
shown by the placement of garrison/strength counters in the
appropriate boxes. For this purpose, use any national or neutral
infantry or militia garrison/strength counter or counters. The
counters used can be of any type or nationality, as it is their
strength and the box they occupy that determine their effect and
what they represent. For example, a French militia counter of 3
factors in a Russian cavalry box acts as 3 cavalry factors, not as
militia. These factors are also interchangeable (e.g., a 2 and a 1
factor counters can be exchanged for a 3 factor counter, etc.), as
with the garrison strengths (see 2.4. 1). Note that most corps for
most major powers allow for a maximum number of regular
infantry and/or militia factors plus an additional number of
cavalry factors (plus an additional number of guard factors in
some cases).
2.4.2.1.2 Altering Strengths: The current strength of a corps or
fleet is altered as strengths vary (e.g., because of swapping factors
between corps, combat losses, foraging losses, garrison
detachments, etc.) by changing the number of factors in the
appropriate boxes of that corps or fleet.
2.4.2.1.3 Economic Manipulation (Optional): If option 12.5 is
used, the major power's economic manipulation markers should
be initially placed in the 0 boxes of their ECONOMIC
MANIPULATION DISPLAYS.
2.4.2.2 USING SIDE TWO OF THE NATIONAL CARDS:
Side two of the major power National Cards is recommended for
campaign games because most garrison/strength counters will be
required to show garrisons and also because other sections are
handy for maintaining economic and reinforcement records for
both the major powers and their controlled minor Free States.
This side of the cards should be photocopied and used simply by
penciling in information and erasing as changes are made.
2.4.2.2.1: Corps and fleet strengths for both the major power and
its controlled minor Free States can be penciled in and erased and
adjusted as necessary.
2.4.2.2.2: Money expenditures between Economic Phases,
prisoners, etc. can be recorded on any free space on the copies.
2.4.2.2.3: Economic manipulation (see option 12.5) is recorded as
part of the ECONOMIC AND MANPOWER WORKSHEET on
side two plus using the ECONOMIC MANIPULATION
DISPLAYS on side one.
2.4.3 STATUS CARD SETUP: The displays on this card record
game information.
2.4.3.1 TIME: Place the Turn markers (month and year) in the
appropriate boxes of the TIME DISPLAY to match the starting
date of the scenario or campaign.
2.4.3.2 * VICTORY POINTS: Place the victory point markers
(three per major power) on the VICTORY POINTS DISPLAY to
record each major power's starting victory points as given in the
campaign. Use the negative sides to show negative points
(possible in campaign games starting in 1805 if 14.2 and/or 14.3
are used) and the positive sides to show positive points.
3.0 SEQUENCE OF PLAY OF THE GAME
A "Turn" in EMPIRES IN ARMS represents one month of real
time. Each Turn consists of a number of "phases" which may be
further broken down into "steps." Each phase or step is completed by
all players before going to the next. Any phases or steps that do not
apply during a Turn can be skipped. The sequence of a Turn (also
given on the Game Card) is as follows:
[ 3.1 ] * THE POLITICAL PHASE: See 4.0. Players interact to
achieve the game's political goals. This phase is performed in
steps, as follows:
A. The Diplomacy Step.
B. The Declarations of War Step.
C. The Call to Allies Step. The order of calling is determined by
competitive die rolls.
D. The Peace Step. Peace term selection order is determined by the
order the major powers went to war.
E. The Creating Alliances Step.
F. The Minor Country Control Step. Setup in the order: France,
Russia, Turkey, Austria, Prussia, Great Britain, Spain.
G. The Breaking Alliances Step.
H. The Free State Declaration Step.
I. The Declaration of Combined Movement Step.
[ 3.2 ] THE REINFORCEMENT PHASE: See Section 5.0.
Reinforcements are introduced into the game and strength factors
are transferred or eliminated. This phase is performed in steps, as
follows:
A *. The Naval Reinforcement Step. The major powers perform
this step in the order; Spain, France, Prussia, Austria, Turkey,
Russia, Great Britain.
B. The Army Reinforcement Step. The major powers perform
this step in the order; Spain, Great Britain, Prussia, Austria,
Turkey, Russia, France.
[ 3.3 ] * THE NAVAL PHASE: See 6.0. All naval operations are
handled. The major powers perform this phase in the sequence;
Great Britain (any announced position in the sequence), Russia,
Turkey, Austria, Prussia, France, Spain. As each major power
performs this phase, the following steps are performed in order:
4.0 * THE POLITICAL PHASE
The actions of the Political Phase occur in the following order of
steps and during this phase only. The exception to this is
declaration of war, which can also occur at other specified times
(see 4.3, 4.6.4.2, 4.6.5, 6.3.1.2.2 and 7.3.8.3).
[ 4.1 ] THE DIPLOMACY STEP: During this step, an agreed-
upon period of time is set aside for discussion among the players.
We recommend no more than 5-10 minutes to keep the game
moving. Generally, players will wish to separate into pairs or small
groups and move out of earshot of others for "secret” negotiations.
This is the time to talk to other players about getting together for
3
2.4.3.3 * POLITICAL STATUS: Place the political status
markers (one per major power) on the POLITICAL STATUS
DISPLAY to record each major power's starting political status as
given in the campaign. The starting boxes for each campaign are
identified by letters for the major power (i.e., "Tu" = Turkey) and
Roman numerals referenced to the campaign games on the
"Campaign Setup" line of the boxes. The POLITICAL POINTS
CHART on the back of this rulebook is for reference when using
the POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY.
A. The Naval Movement Step.
B. The Naval Combat Step.
[ 3.4 ] THE LAND PHASE: See 7.0. All land operations are
handled. The major powers in campaign games perform this
phase in the sequence; France (any announced position in the
sequence), Russia, Turkey, Austria, Prussia, Great Britain,
Spain. In scenarios the French always go first, followed by all of
the other major powers on the other side. As each major power
performs this phase, the following steps are performed in order.
(Perform Steps A-E in each Major Power’s Sequence. Perform
Step F at the end of the last player’s Land Phase.)
A. The Depot Creation/Removal Step'
B. The Land Movement Step.
C. The Supply Step.
D. The Land Combat Step.
(1) Resolve field, limited field and trivial combats.
(2) Resolve siege combats.
E. The Guerrilla Step.
F. * The Conquest Step.
[ 3.5 ] * THE ECONOMIC PHASE: See 8.0. This phase
occurs only every three months-at the end of the March, June,
September and December Turns. This phase is performed in
steps as follows:
A. The Victory Points Step.
B. The Money and Manpower Collection Step.
C. The Lending Money Step.
D. The Manipulation Step.
E. The Money and Manpower Expenditure Step.
F. The Political Status Adjustment Step.
G. The Civil Disorder Step.
H. The Ceding Step.
I. The New Political Combinations Step (see options 11. I- 11.
6 and 11.8).
J. The Levy Step.
K. The UMP Control Step.
[ 3.6 ] THE TIME RECORD PHASE: See 9.0. The passage of
a Turn is recorded.
declarations of war, checking to see if allies will respond if
called, preliminary discussions about peace terms, asking if
others wish to ally, deciding on combined movements and their
announcement, expressing pleasure or displeasure, making
promises and threats, etc.
Diplomacy can be conducted at any phase during the game FIN;
however, we will NOT regularly stop the game for players to
conduct diplomacy. JJ
[ 4.2 ] THE DECLARATIONS OF WAR STEP: Next, each
player secretly writes down every major power or neutral minor
country upon which he has chosen to declare war (if any). Players
not declaring war may wish to write "no declarations" just to keep
everybody guessing. All declarations are revealed simultaneously.
In order for a major power and its controlled minor countries to
attack another major power or neutral minor country or their
forces, a declaration of war must have been made between them
during this step (EXCEPTIONS: see 4.3, 4.6.4.2, 4.6.5, 6.3.1.2.2
and 7.3.8.3). A major power that declares war is called an
"aggressor", and a major power or neutral minor country upon
which war is declared is called a "defender."
4.2.1 POLITICAL POINT LOSSES FOR WAR
DECLARATIONS: Major Powers lose political points for each of
their declarations and these changes must be recorded (see the
POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY on the Status Card).
4.2.1.1: A major power loses three political points whenever it
declares war on another major power. Additionally, if a major
power declares war on an ally, there is an additional loss of two
political points for breaking the alliance by the declaration of war.
4.2.1.2: A major power loses one political point for each district
(see 10.4) in a neutral minor country when it declares war on that
minor country, unless no major power can be found to run that
minor country (see 4.6).
4.2.2 LIMITATIONS OF DECLARATIONS: A major power
may declare war within the following limitations:
4.2.2.1: A major power may not declare war on another major
power or neutral minor country if the declaring major power has
corps, freikorps, cossacks, garrisons or guerrillas within the
second major power's territory or within that neutral minor
country.
4.2.2.2: A major power already at war with another major power
may not declare war on other major powers if unbesieged enemy
infantry corps are already inside of its home nation. Gen 23/4
An area that cannot be reached by land movement from Paris or
London does not count as being inside one’s home nation for the
purpose of this rule only (ie. Turkish or Spanish islands).
4.2.2.3: War may not be declared on a neutral minor country if it is
physically impossible for the declaring major power to enter the
minor country's territory during the Turn.
4.2.2.4: A major power may not declare war against another major
power if restricted by an enforced peace (see 4.4.6.3).
EXCEPTIONS: See 6.3.1.2.2 and provisions of peace term B.6
(see VICTORY CONDITIONS CHART on the Game Card.
4.2.3 EXTENT OF DECLARATIONS: A declaration of war on
a major power is also (at no further cost in political points) a
declaration of war on all of its controlled minor countries.
Controlled minor countries may not have war declared upon them
separately.
[ 4.3 ] THE CALL TO ALLIES STEP: Any major power who
has in this Political Phase declared war on another major power or
has had war declared upon it, may demand that an ally
immediately declare war on the new enemy, if not already at war
with that enemy. If there is more than one declaration of war
during a Declaration of War Step, the order in which defending
and then ally to more than one major power simultaneously, the
same or aggressor players may "call to allies" is determined by
competitive die rolls.
4.3.1 ALLY CALLING PROCEDURE: A player may call on
some allies and not on others, at the calling player's discretion.
4.3.1.1: The defender calls his allies first, and then an aggressor
may call his allies only if the defender has attempted to do so. If
there were multiple declarations of war, all defenders call on their
allies followed by (if allowed) all aggressors.
4.3.1.2: If two major powers declare war on each other
simultaneously, they are both considered aggressors and thus
neither may call allies.
4.3.1.3: Should a called ally of a defender refuse a call, that
refusing ally is considered to have broken the alliance and loses
the requisite political points (-2. See the POLITICAL POINTS
CHART on the back of these rules). If any allies of an aggressor
refuse his call to allies, both the ally and the aggressor are
4
considered to have broken the alliance, with both losing the
requisite political points (-2) for breaking an alliance.
4.3.1.4: If any ally cannot declare war because of peace-time
restrictions (an enforced peace-see 4.4.6.3), that ally may not be
called upon. If an ally cannot declare war for other reasons (see
4.2.2. 1 and 4.2.2.2), the ally can still be called and, since the
call cannot be answered, will be forced to break its alliance.
4.3.2 ANSWERING A CALL: Allies called upon may only
declare war upon the original aggressor or defender-further
declarations of war resulting from a call to allies do not permit a
further call to allies.
[ 4.4 ] THE PEACE STEP: Peace may be made only at this
time. A lapse of war with a minor country may also occur during
this step (see 4.6.6). Peace must be in one of the following
forms.
4.4.1 INFORMAL PEACE: Two major powers may informally
agree to a peace between themselves on whatever general terms
they decide, none of which are enforceable, and no political
points are involved. An informal peace may never involve
removing forces, the immediate ceding of territory, corps on
loan, royal marriages, removal of leaders or dissolving or re-
establishing the Holy Roman Empire. In this case there is no 18
month enforced peace and no enforceable reparations, trade
restrictions, etc. can be imposed but forces are repatriated (see
4.4.6.2). If major powers simultaneously sue each other for
peace (some players prefer to have this written and revealed
simultaneously), they MUST both accept an informal peace.
Gen 27/2
4.4.2 SUING FOR PEACE: A major power wishing to
"surrender" may "sue" for peace. Minor countries may not sue
for peace, although peace can come through a "lapse" in a war
(see 4.6.6).
4.4.2.1: A major power may not sue for peace to another major
power that does not have forces within the suing home nation’s
borders unless, at the same time, it sues for peace to all major
powers with which it is at war.
4.4.2.2: When a major power sues for peace, the opponent must
then offer a "formal peace," either a "conditional peace," which
must be accepted, or an "unconditional peace," which may be
accepted only if the suing player desires. If desired, and several
major powers are being sued for peace, have each player write
down 'conditional' or 'unconditional' before revealing all the
peace proposals simultaneously. Gen 27/2
4.4.2.3: Political points change as follows (also see the
POLITICAL POINTS CHART on the back of these rules):
4.4.2.3.1 Conditional Surrender: A major power accepting the
conditional surrender of another major power gains + 3 political
points. A major power that surrenders conditionally to any
number of other major powers at the same time (but does not
surrender unconditionally to any other major power at that same
time) loses -5 political points.
4.4.2.3.2 Unconditional Surrender: A major power accepting the
unconditional surrender of another major power gains +5
political points. A major power that surrenders unconditionally
to any number of other major powers at the same time (some
simultaneous surrenders may be conditional, but at least one
must be unconditional) loses -8 political points.
4.4.3 CONDITIONAL PEACE: If the peace is conditional, the
loser surrenders and chooses one "peace condition" (also called a
"peace term") that will apply to him with that victor from list
"A" of the VICTORY CONDITIONS CHART on the Game
Card and the victor chooses up to two peace conditions from list
"B" not conflicting with the list "A" choice. If surrendering
condition ally to more than one major power simultaneously, the
same or a different peace condition from list "A" may be
selected for each victor.
4.4.4 UNCONDITIONAL PEACE: If the peace is
unconditional, each victor chooses up to three conditions from
lists "B" and/or "C" and the surrendering loser does not get a
choice from list "A". Certain choices in list "B" preclude choices
from "C" and vice-versa, as shown on the VICTORY
CONDITIONS CHART on the Game Card.
4.4.5 SIMULTANEOUS PEACE WITH MULTIPLE
ENEMIES: If a major power makes peace by "surrendering" to
two or more enemies at once, it loses only one (the larger, if there
is a difference) set of political points.
4.4.5.1: The victors choose their peace terms on an alternating
basis until each has gained the maximum number of peace terms
possible and/or desired or all peace terms available for that type of
surrender have been taken.
4.4.5.2: Victors choose their alternating peace terms in the order
that they went to war with the surrendering power-if the victors
went to war at the same time (a major power that went to war as a
result of a call from an ally is considered to have gone to war after
the caller), resolve the order of choice by competitive die rolls.
4.4.5.3: Regardless of the number of victors, no peace term may be
chosen more than once (EXCEPTION: peace term C.6, which all
victors must choose as one of their selections to go into effect). For
example, if one victor chose peace term B.4 (which also precludes
choices B.1 and Cl ), no other victor could choose B.1, B.4 or C.].
4.4.6 EFFECTS OF PEACE: When two major powers make any
type of peace, the following are always done:
4.4.6.1 PRISONER EXCHANGE: All surrendered factors and
captured leaders are mutually exchanged. The exchanged factors
are placed the same as reinforcements (see 5.2 and 5.3) during the
next Reinforcement Phase. This is the only time prisoners are
exchanged, although captured leaders may be returned at other
times at the captor's option (see 10.6.3).
4.4.6.2 FORCE REPATRIATION: All corps in the other major
power's territory are picked up and moved to the nearest area or
areas in a now (after the control of ceded territories has been
marked) friendly-controlled province or minor country. Similarly,
garrisons are picked up and moved to the nearest friendly area or
areas where depots and/or cities are available to hold the factors. If
two or more areas are equidistant, the owning player chooses the
area, or may choose to place some forces in some of or each of the
equidistant areas. All depots in the other major power's territory
are just picked up. All fleets (unless given permission to stay) must
leave during the next Naval Phase. EXCEPTION: If the victor
chooses peace term C.5, none of the victor's forces may be
repatriated, but garrison factors in capital cities must (except with
permission to stay) be moved to the nearest possible area(s) that
can hold them that is not a capital city.
4.4.6.3 MANDATORY ENFORCED PEACE LENGTH:
Except for an informal peace, neither Major Power may declare
war on the other for 18 months (EXCEPTIONS: see 6.3.1.2.2 and
provisions of peace term B.6). Certain peace terms may extend this
time period for the loser (see peace terms B.2 and C.2 on the
VICTORY CONDITIONS CHART on the Game Card). Keep
written records of when peaces are made and when major powers
may again go to war.
4.4.6.4 STATUS OF CEDED MINOR FREE STATES: Any
major power that acquires minor Free States as a result of peace
conditions B.7 or C.4 may accept them as they are with their forces
or immediately change them to conquered minor countries and
remove their forces as in 8.8.5.
4.4.7 SEPARATE PEACE AND ALLIES: If a major power
surrenders to some but remains at war with other major powers, a
major power with which war continues may demand that an ally or
allies that was a victor in the formal peace immediately break their
alliance(s) with the major power still at war (and lose -2 political
points for breaking the alliance). For example, Russia and Austria
are allies and are both at war with Prussia. Prussia surrenders to
Austria, but not to Russia. The Russian player may demand that
Austria break its alliance with Russia. An ally may also demand
that an ally that concludes an informal peace with a common
enemy break their alliance.
4.4.8 A FINAL PEACE: If, as a result of a formal peace, a major
power's province containing its home nation's capital is ceded
(which can only be done if no alternate province is available for
5
ceding), that major power is permanently out of the game and all
of its home nation forces are permanently eliminated from the
map.
[ 4.5 ] THE CREATING ALLIANCES STEP: New formal
alliances are now announced and each of the two major powers
that ally gain political points (see the POLITICAL POINTS
CHART on the back of these rules).
4.5.1: Major Powers who are already allied may not re-ally with
each other.
4.5.2: Major Powers at war with one another may not ally.
4.5.3: Major Powers that broke an earlier alliance may not re-
ally until at least twelve months after the date of breaking the
earlier alliance (keep written records of when alliances are
broken).
[4.6] THE MINOR COUNTRY CONTROL STEP: A major
power must, if possible, be chosen to run each neutral minor
country upon which war has been declared. The major power
chosen must not be at war with that neutral minor country and
may only be an ally of a major power at war with it if there are
no non-allies willing or eligible to run it. If there is no major
power willing or eligible to run the minor country, no attacker
loses political points for declaring war on it and its forces are not
set up. (See 10. 2. 1 for conquering min or neutral countries.)
4.6.1 CONTROL CHANGE DUE TO
INSTABILITY/FIASCO
POLITICAL STATUS: If a controlling major power's political
status marker is located in' the Instability or Fiasco Zones on the
POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY on the Status Card during a
Minor Country Control Step, its controlled minor countries may
change control or revert to neutral status at the start of this step
(see 10.5.2 for details).
4.6.2 SELECTING CONTROLLING MAJOR POWERS:
The major power who will run the minor country is that with the
highest modified die roll, with any ties being decided by
additional competitive unmodified die rolls. Each eligible major
power that wishes do so may roll a die, modifying the result by:
4.6.2.1 NATIONAL MODIFIERS: Find the national modifiers
on the MINOR COUNTRIES CHART on the Game Card Next
to the name of each minor country in the "National Modifiers"
column, is the national modifier located under an abbreviation of
each major power.
4.6.2.2 STATUS MODIFIERS: See the POLITICAL STATUS
DISPLAY on the Status Card. The "Status Modifier" is given to
the right of each line or "zone." For example, if a major power's
political status marker is in a box of the Dominant Zone, the
modifier is + 1.
4.6.2.3 ALREADY AT WAR: If already at war with any of the
major powers who have declared war on that minor neutral, a +2
modifier applies.
4.6.3 ASSUMING CONTROL PROCEDURE:
4.6.3.1 MARKING CONTROL: The major power selected to
run the minor country gains a political point per district (see
10.4) in the minor country (record on the POLITICAL POINTS
CHART on the Status Card), and, to show control, places one of
its control flags in the minor country. If the minor country has no
forces, a conquered control flag is placed there. If the minor
count has forces, that player places a Free State control flag in
that country and immediately sets them up. Once a player has
been selected to run a minor country, that minor country may no
longer incur separate declarations of war, until it returns to
neutrality.
4.6.3.2 ORDER OF SETUP: If the forces of a number of
different minor countries all need to be set up, they should be set
up by the controlling major powers in the order: France, Russia,
Turkey, Austria, Prussia, Great Britain, Spain.
4.6.3.3 INITIAL STRENGTH FACTORS: The MINOR
COUNTRIES CHART on the Game Card shows the starting
minor country strengths in infantry ("If"), cavalry ("Cv") and
ships ("Sh") for campaign games starting in the given years. This
chart also shows the state of each minor country at the start of
these campaign games-whether it is neutral, conquered, a Free
State, what major power controls it, etc.
4.6.3.4 LAND SETUP: Any, all or none of the minor country
corps are set up in any area(s) of that minor country and its initial
army strength factors distributed among those corps and/or as
garrisons.
4.6.3.4.1 CAPITAL GARRISON: Every neutral minor (even
those which have no corps marker) when declared war upon gains
one infantry PER CAPITAL to place as a garrison. This is in
addition to any forces listed on the MINOR COUNTRIES
CHART. At a minimum this one factor must remain as a garrison
until the minor is conquered, the war lapses or the controlling
major is no longer at war. When the war ends, if the minor is a
Free State, it retains the garrison(s), otherwise remove them. JJ
4.6.3.5 FLEET SETUP: If the minor country has a fleet, it is set
up in any port in that minor country or in any sea area adjacent to
such a port, at its current strength.
4.6.3.6 POLITICAL POINTS FROM CONTROL: The major
power controlling the minor Free State gains and loses political
points for any combats involving the minor country's forces.
4.6.4 MORE THAN ONE DECLARATION OF WAR UPON
A MINOR COUNTRY: If more than one major power has
declared war on the same neutral minor country in the same Turn,
any of the major powers may back down from the war declaration
(but still lose the political points for the declaration)-if necessary,
the involved players should secretly write down their intentions
and reveal them simultaneously. If any two major powers who are
both in a period of enforced peace (see 4.4.6.3) with each other and
hence are not able to declare war upon one another, both declare
war upon the same minor country then they must both back down,
still paying the political point cost for the war declaration. If a
major power is unable to declare war on any other major power
that also declared war on the minor country for any other reasons
(see 4.2.2.1 and 4.2.2.2 or for portions of a loser's enforced peace
that exceed a winner's enforced peace), that major power must
back down, still paying the political point cost for the war
declaration. Major Powers are not considered to have broken an
alliance by these actions.
4.6.4.1 RETAINING CONTROL: If, after this, no major powers
remain at war (including a lapse of war - see 4.6.6) with the minor
country it remains in the control of the major power who gained
control through 4.6.2.
4.6.4.2 FORCED WAR DECLARATIONS: If two or more
major powers do not back down and remain at war with the minor
country, each must declare war on all the other major powers also
attacking the minor country (if not already at war with them all).
All those remaining major powers are eligible to attack the minor
country and each other, but not minor country's the controlling
major power (unless at war with it).
4.6.4.2.1: This costs the same in total as a declaration of war on
one major power.
4.6.4.2.2: If there are any allies and/or royal marriages involved,
then the alliances and/or royal marriages are broken and the
requisite points lost for EACH. Gen 23/4
4.6.4.2.3: There are no calls to allies for these declarations of war.
5.0 THE REINFORCEMENT PHASE
Reinforcements are those counters and strength factors including
leaders due to enter the game in the current month. All operations
discussed in this section may be performed only during this phase,
unless stated otherwise.
[ 5.1 ] * THE NAVAL REINFORCEMENT STEP: In this step,
all players may place on the board those naval reinforcements due
this Turn. This step is performed in the order; Spain, France,
Prussia, Austria, Turkey, Russia, Great Britain.
6
4.6.5 MAJOR POWER SUPPORT OF CONTROLLED
MINOR COUNTRIES: The minor power's controlling major
power now has the option (if eligible and not restricted-see
4.2.2) of declaring war on none, any, or all of the aggressors.
4.6.5.1: This costs (in political points) the same in total,
regardless of the number of declarations of war, as for a
declaration of war on one major power (-3 political points) plus
the political points lost for each broken alliance (-2 political
points). No allies can be called for these declarations of war.
4.6.5.2: If the controlling power desires to help the minor
country against the major power(s) attacking it, it has to declare
war on or already be at war with the other major power(s) before
its forces can take part in any combat with that other major
power. If it is not at war with at least one of the attacking major
powers, the con-trolling major power may not garrison or control
any cities of the minor country other than with that minor
country's factors-the minor country must be run using only the
minor country's own forces, although the controlling major
power may pay for depots and/or supply costs for the minor
country.
4.6.5.3: The controlling major power's corps are ignored in any
combat involving that minor country's forces unless against a
force which consists of factors of one or more countries with
which it is at war (see 6.3.1 and 7.3.8)
4.6.6 LAPSE OF WAR WITH MINOR COUNTRIES: If,
during any Peace Step prior to the conquest of a minor country,
any invading major power has no corps within that minor
country, then that major power is considered to be no longer at
war with the minor country and must be at war with the major
power controlling it before he can attack it again. Any garrisons,
cossacks and/or freikorps are repatriated as per 4.4.6.2. NOTE:
For multi-district minor countries (see 10.4), this applies if a
secondary district has been conquered and there are no invading
major power corps within the rest of that minor country.
[ 4.7 ] THE BREAKING ALLIANCES STEP: A major power
may break any standing alliances, even if made this Turn, paying
the political points cost of -2 for breaking an alliance. This is not
a declaration of war.
[ 4.8 ] THE FREE STATE DECLARATION STEP: Major
powers can declare that any of their conquered minor countries
that can have corps are now minor Free States. Replace the
conquered control flag with a Free State control flag in that
country. Its fleet if any, is set up at its current strength and its
corps, fleets, land, and naval factors may be purchased beginning
in the next Economic Phase (see 8.2 and 8.5). Once a major
power has declared a minor country to be a Free State, it may not
be later "undeclared" (ie., switched back to being a conquered
minor country by that major power).
[ 4.9 ] THE DECLARATION OF COMBINED
MOVEMENT STEP: Allies may declare that their Naval and
Land Phases will be combined for the remainder of the Turn,
with movement of all their forces being conducted in the order
of the ally moving last in each phase. This enables allies to move
and attack together (see 6.1.2 and 7.1.2). If desired, write down
combined movement declarations and reveal them
simultaneously. Gen 23/4
5.1.1 PLACING EMPTY FLEET COUNTERS: Purchased
(see 8.5.4) empty fleet counters (called "fleets") may be placed
in any friendly-controlled home nation port or with any existing
fleet counter but must have at least one ship strength factor
(called "ships") immediately placed in (see 5.1.2) or transferred
(see 5.1.3) to them.
5.1.2 PLACING SHIPS: All ships due this Turn (see 8.5.3)
may be placed in any of their fleets (including fleets just placed
by 5.1.1) in a friendly controlled home nation port or conquered
minor country port, whether blockaded or not, but not so as to
exceed the ship capacity of any fleet. Ships due this Turn can be
postponed until any later Turn or Turns (keep a written record of
all postponed ships). Minor Free State ships are added similarly
but only in ports of that minor Free State.
5.1.3 TRANSFER OF SHIPS: During a Naval Reinforcement
Step, a major power may also transfer ships between fleets
occupying the same sea area, blockade box or port. Fleets of
different nationalities (including different minor countries or of a
major power and any minor country) may not transfer ships. If all
ships are transferred from a fleet, the fleet counter is removed from
the map at no cost in political points (see 5.1.4. 1).
5.1.4 REMOVING FLEETS AND SHIPS ("SCUTTLING")
A player may remove any of his fleet counters (permanently
eliminating all untransferred ships, if any, that they contain).
Scuttling can also occur under conditions covered in 6.2.6.
5.1.4.1: Each fleet "scuttled" that contains one or more ships
causes the loss of -1 political point (record on the POLITICAL
STATUS DISPLAY on the Status Card). Removing a fleet that
contains no ships costs no political points.
5.1.4.2: Minor country fleets and major power UMP (see 14.3)
fleets may never be scuttled during this step.
5.1.4.3: A fleet counter must be repurchased during the Money and
Manpower Expenditure Step of an Economic Phase (see 8.5.4) to
be placed back on the map.
[ 5.2 ] THE ARMY REINFORCEMENT STEP: In this step, all
players may place on the board those army reinforcements due this
Turn. Army factors of artillery, regular cavalry, guard infantry
(called "guard"), regular infantry and militia infantry (called
"militia") factors (feudal infantry, feudal cavalry, insurrection
corps militia, insurrection corps cavalry, cossack, freikorps and
guerrilla factors are also army factors but they are not placed on
the map-board during this step unless part of a prisoner exchange-
see 4.4.6. 1) due this Turn must be added as reinforcements. Their
placement may not be delayed. Army factors that cannot be placed
are lost. This step is performed in the order; Spain, Great Britain,
Prussia, Austria, Turkey, Russia, France.
5.2.1 CORPS COUNTER REINFORCEMENTS:
5.2.1.1 SCENARIO CORPS PLACEMENT: The scenarios
specifically provide for the placement of new corps counters. If
placement is not possible, due to enemy control of or the presence
of enemy corps in the placement area, the corps counters (and all
army factors they hold) are lost.
5.2.1.2 * CAMPAIGN CORPS PLACEMENT: Purchased
empty corps counters may be placed in an unbesieged home nation
city (or minor Free State city for corps of that minor Free State) or
with any existing, unbesieged friendly corps. A factor must be
immediately placed in (see 5.2.2.2) or transferred (see 5.2.3) to
such a corps.
5.2.2 PLACING ARMY FACTORS: If placement of any army
factor reinforcements is not possible, due to corps limits or
garrison capacities or enemy siege and/or control of cities, these
reinforcements are lost.
5.2.2.1 SCENARIO ARMY FACTOR PLACEMENT: The
scenarios specifically provide for the placement of all
reinforcement forces. Army factors specified to be placed in an
area may be added to corps or as garrisons in that area. For the
scenarios, eligible corps are those that are unbesieged and which
have the capacity to hold the factors.
5.2.2.2 CAMPAIGN ARMY FACTOR PLACEMENT:
5.2.2.2.1 Adding to Corps Inside Home Nations: Factors may be
added to any unbesieged corps of the same nationality which has
the capacity and is inside its home nation (this excludes ceded
provinces). Minor Free State factors can be added in this way, but
inside that minor Free State's borders. NOTE: Feudal corps must
be in their home province which currently contains no unbesieged
enemy corps (see 10. 1. 3) or off-map and insurrection corps must
be in an Austrian-controlled border province which currently
contains no unbesieged enemy corps (see 10. 1.4) or off-map-
during an Army Reinforcement Step feudal and insurrection corps
will only get reinforcements from prisoner exchanges (normally
they get new factors during December Levy Steps-see 8.10,
10.1.3.1 and 10.1.4.3).
7
5.2.2.2.2 Adding Factors to Garrisons: Regular infantry (guard
or regular cavalry factors may be 'Converted to infantry factors
in order to be placed in garrison-see 7.3.3.2) or militia factors
may be added as garrisons in unbesieged friendly-controlled
cities in the home nation. Minor Free State infantry factors can
be added in this way but only inside that minor Free State's
borders.
5.2.2.2.3 Adding Factors to Corps in Supply: Any army factor
can be added to an unbesieged corps of the same nationally
which is not up to full strength (for the type of factor) and which
is on or adjacent to a friendly depot that is a supply source or
part of a valid supply chain (see 7.2.3). Another major power's
depot or supply chain may not be used for this purpose.
5.2.2.2.3.1: For regular infantry, regular cavalry, artillery
or guard infantry factors, this depot must be part of a valid
supply chain of six or less depots to that point, which
starts at a supply source in the home nation.
5.2.2.2.3.2: For militia factors, the valid supply chain can
only be at most three depots long to that point.
5.2.2.2.3.3: Minor Free States may receive their factors in
the same way, but must trace a supply line (of their
controlling major power) back to a supply source in their
minor country.
5.2.2.2.3.4: Supply lines for reinforcements may be also
be traced in whole or in part via sea supply (see 7.4.3) but
not via invasion supply (see 7.4.4)
5.2.3 TRANSFER OF ARMY FACTORS: During an Army
Reinforcement Step unbesieged corps in the same area may
exchange factors as desired, capacity permitting. Corps of
different nationalities (including different minors or a major
power and a minor country) may not exchange factors. This is
the only time during a Turn that army factors may be exchanged
except to detach and absorb garrison factors (see 7.3.3). Army
factors may also be exchanged with garrisons in the same area
during this step, the same as in 7.3.3 and, if all factors are
detached from a corps, the corps counter is removed (see 5.2.4).
EXCEPTIONS: Feudal, insurrection and artillery factors may
not be exchanged.
5.2.4 REMOVING CORPS AND ARMY FACTORS
("DEMO-
BILIZING"): At this time army factors forming all or any part
of a garrison of a city or depot and/or corps counters (and any
army factors they may hold) may be removed from the board.
These factors are lost, but there is no political point penalty.
5.2.4.1: In scenarios a corps counter may be brought back on the
map when a corps counter is designated as a reinforcement.
5.2.4.2 *: In campaign games, a corps counter that has been
removed from the map must be purchased during a later Money
and Manpower Expenditure Step of an Economic Phase (see
8.5.4) to be returned to the map.
5.2.5 SCENARIO MONEY: Money received in scenarios
arrives during the Army Reinforcement Step (money arrives
during the Economic Phase of campaign games). Money is in the
form of "money points," denoted by a "$" for convenience.
[ 5.3 ] LEADER RETIREMENT AND REINFORCEMENT:
Leaders may be retired from the map during their appropriate
Reinforcement Step or if all their corps are eliminated by
foraging (see 7.4.1.3.3) or by failure to disembark (see 6.2.5.2).
Leaders may not be retired if in a besieged city (a besieged port
city must also be blockaded to prevent a leader's retirement).
Retired leaders are returned (along with newly introduced
leaders) as reinforcements on any later Army Reinforcement
Step (Naval Reinforcement Step for the NELSON leader).
Leader reinforcements may be placed with any corps (fleets for
NELSON) controlled by their major power.
5.3.1 LEADER MINIMUMS: If a major power loses leaders
(wounded or killed, captured leaders do not count) and has fewer
leaders than listed for their country below, then they may receive
a “generic” replacement leader counter to his force pools. This
represents a random general that would be available if other
leaders were killed or wounded “generic” replacement leader.
There can only be one extra leader per country. On the
Reinforcement Phase [5.0] where a major power again has this
minimum (due to wounded leaders returning or gaining new
leaders as listed reinforcements), then instantly remove the
“generic” leader, even if he is besieged. JJ
Austria: fewer than 3 leaders, gains a 123D
France: fewer than 4 leaders, gains a 223D
Great Britain: fewer than 1 (non-naval) leader, gains a
222D - Yes, this give GB a leader at the start of the
1805 campaign.
Prussia: fewer than 2 leaders, gains a 122D
Russia: fewer than 3 leaders, gains a 114D
Spain: fewer than 2 leaders, gains a 112D
Turkey: fewer than 3 leaders, gains a 213D
5.3.1.1 When a Replacement Leader Can be Used: When a
replacement leader becomes available, during the next
Reinforcement Phase [5.0] add the country specific leader to that
country’s force pool. (Example: Spain is down to one leader and so
gains his 112D.) There can only be one extra leader per country in
use. This leader may be added as a normal leader from this point
onwards. On the Reinforcement Phase [5.0] where a major power
again has this minimum (due to wounded leaders returning or
6.0 THE NAVAL PHASE
[ 6.1 ] THE NAVAL PHASE SEQUENCE: At the beginning of
this phase, Great Britain announces when in the following
sequence he will be moving. The other major powers move in this
order: Russia, Turkey, Austria, Prussia, France, Spain.
6.1.1 MINOR FREE STATE SEQUENCE: All naval forces of
minor Free States move with their controlling major power.
6.1.2 COMBINED MOVE SEQUENCE: In order for a major
power to move in the sequence of another major power, those
major powers must be allies and must have announced combined
movement during the Declaration of Combined Movement Step of
the Political Phase. Combined major power movement is
conducted in the sequence of the ally who would have moved last
in the phase.
6.1.3 NAVAL PHASE STEPS: Each major power sequence of
the Naval Phase is divided into Naval Movement and Naval
Combat Steps. Each player completes both steps during his major
power sequence before the next player commences his major
power sequence. The player taking his sequence and his counters
are described as "phasing" during that time and all other players
and their counters are called "non-phasing."
[ 6.2 ] THE NAVAL MOVEMENT STEPS: Major power
players may move any or all of their fleets up to the limit of their
movement allowances during their sequence of a Naval Phase.
6.2.1 GENERAL NAVAL MOVEMENT RULES: Each fleet
has a maximum movement allowance of 7 movement points.
Phasing fleets may expend from 0 to 7 movement points each
during their sequence. Movement points may not be accumulated
from Turn to Turn nor may they be transferred among fleets.
6.2.1.1 SEA MOVEMENT COSTS: Each sea area entered costs
one movement point.
6.2.1.2 PORT/BLOCKADE BOX MOVEMENT: It costs one
point to move into a port from any of the sea areas touching its
blockade box and vice-versa. It costs one movement point to enter
a blockade box from an adjacent sea area or vice-versa. It costs no
movement points to move between a port and its blockade box or
vice-versa and all fleets entering or exiting ports are considered to
do so by passing through the port's blockade box. To signify that a
fleet is in port, it is placed on the coastline of the associated land
area. A fleet(s) may enter a port controlled by another major power
or neutral minor country only to attack a fleet(s) there or with the
controlling major power's permission, even if the port city has no
garrison. In no other cases may a fleet be located in a land area.
6.2.1.3 DARDANELLES MOVEMENT: A fleet may not enter
the Dardanelles sea area unless that major power controls an
unbesieged Constantinople, besieges Constantinople (see 10.7) or
has access (see 10.3) from the major power controlling
Constantinople.
8
gaining new leaders as listed reinforcements), then instantly
remove the “generic” leader, even if he is besieged. JJ
5.3.1.2 Replacement Leader Capture: A replacement leader is
never captured. If the stack with a replacement leader is
completely destroyed, the replacement leader is returned to the
controlling player. These represent generic leaders of no real
importance. If one is “captured” or killed, they would just
replace him with some other general. JJ
5.3.1.3 Replacement Leader Usage Restrictions: A
replacement leader may only be stacked with a force where at
least 50% of the army factors are of the same nationality.
(Neither controlled minor Free States nor Kingdom factors count
for this limit.) At the end of any phase where there are fewer
than 50% of the leader’s national forces in the same stack as the
replacement leader, remove that leader from the board (unless
besieged). He can be brought in again normally on the next
Reinforcement Phase [5.0] normally as long as the requirements
in 5.3.1.1 are still met. JJ
6.2.1.4 ICE LINE RESTRICTIONS: A fleet may not exit or
enter a sea area north of the ice line during any winter month
(see 9. 1). If already in a sea area north of the ice line, it must
remain these until winter ends and no naval combats can be
fought.
6.2.2 NAVAL MOVEMENT PROCEDURE: A major power's
fleets occupying the same port, blockade box or sea area must
always be combined into one "stack." Major powers that are in
the same port, blockade box or sea area that have announced
combined movement are treated as one stack.
6.2.2.1: A player may pick up any or all of the fleets in a stack
and begin moving them as one stack.
6.2.2.2: Fleets may be added to this stack by moving it to the
port, blockade box or sea area containing the fleet(s) desired to
be added.
6.2.2.3: Fleets may be dropped off in any port, blockade box or
sea area through which the stack passes.
6.2.2.4: Once a stack ends its movement, it may not be moved
again this player sequence (EXCEPTIONS: for interceptions, for
retreat or pursuit following naval combat or to leave an enemy-
controlled port-see 6.2.6).
6.2.2.5: So long as no fleet moves twice nor exceeds its
movement allowance, the player may continue to repeat this
process until all desired fleets have been moved.
6.2.3 NAVAL INTERCEPTIONS: Fleets may move through
areas containing other fleets (even enemy fleets) with no
restriction on movement, except that they may be interrupted by
interception. In that case an interception combat is fought
immediately and if, and only if, the phasing major power's fleets
win the interception naval combat may they continue movement
(without any movement penalty). Interceptions may not be
attempted on stacks that are retreating or pursuing (see 6.3.5).
6.2.3.1 INTERCEPTION PROCEDURE: When a phasing
stack enters a sea area occupied by or adjacent to one or more
enemy stacks, those enemy stacks may attempt to intercept the
moving stack. An "enemy stack" is any stack containing fleets at
war with any fleet or fleets in the phasing stack and/or at war
with any corps that the phasing stack may be transporting.
6.2.3.1.1 Sequence of Interception Attempts: If more than one
eligible major power wishes to attempt an interception, they
must make their attempts in the major power sequence decided
for movement in 6.1. Once one major power succeeds, no other
major power may attempt an interception of that same phasing
stack in that same area. Stacks that made or attempted earlier
interceptions may be used again for later interceptions of
different phasing stacks in the same area or of the same phasing
stack in a different area. Major Powers who have declared
combined movement count as one major power for the purposes
of interception, making their interception attempts in the sequence
position of the major power going later in the sequence.
6.2.3.1.2 Who May Intercept: Only properly placed fleets in the
appropriate circumstances may attempt to intercept.
6.2.3.1.2.1: A fleet entering a port (which must always be
done through a blockade box-see 6.2.1.2) may not be
intercepted unless the phasing player announces that he
wishes to be intercepted. This is an exception to the rule of
automatic interception in a blockade box (see 6.2.3.1.2.3).
6.2.3.1.2.2: A fleet in a port may only intercept enemy fleets
entering the adjacent sea area(s) and then only if not
blockaded.
6.2.3.1.2.3: A fleet entering a blockade box may only be
intercepted by enemy fleets which currently occupy that
blockade box and a fleet in a blockade box may only
intercept enemy fleets which enter that blockade box (and
the interception is automatic if attempted).
6.2.3.1.2.4. A fleet adjacent to the Dardenelles sea area
would not be able to intercept fleets entering that area
unless it was permitted under the restrictions of 6.2.1.3.
6.2.3.1.2.5: If a major power attempting an interception has
several different stacks available for an interception, one
stack only may be selected and announced for that
interception attempt. If that stack fails to intercept, no other
stack of the major power may attempt that same
interception.
6.2.3.2 RESOLUTION OF NAVAL INTERCEPTIONS:
6.2.3.2.1 Blockade Box Interceptions: When a phasing stack
enters a blockade box and is automatically intercepted by an
enemy fleet(s) there, it must win the immediate interception naval
combat before it can continue moving.
6.2.3.2.1.1: If more than one enemy major power's fleets
occupy that blockade box, the entering fleet(s) is intercepted
by the major power higher in the sequence specified in 6. 1.
6.2.3.2.1.2: If all enemy fleets choose not to intercept, the
phasing fleet(s) may continue moving (the same as if the
combat had been won).
6.2.3.2.1.3: Since a phasing stack must enter a port to add
fleets in that port to the stack and fleets entering a port may
avoid blockade box interception (see 6.2.3.1.2. 1), a phasing
player wishing to add a fleet or fleets in a port to a stack has
a choice of how to handle a blockade box interception
situation. The phasing player may announce a wish to be
intercepted in the blockade box and fight an interception
combat before entering the port to add the fleets there or
may avoid interception in the blockade box and then (if
movement isn't concluded in the port) move the combined
stack from the port to the blockade box for an automatic (if
interception is desired by the enemy) naval combat then.
6.2.3.2.2 Sea Area Interceptions: Except for interceptions in a
blockade box, a die must be rolled for each stack attempting to
intercept.
6.2.3.2.2.1: If attempting to intercept a phasing stack in an
adjacent sea area, a 0 or 1 must be rolled on one die.
6.2.3.2.2.2: Attempting to intercept a phasing stack in the
same area requires a 0, 1, 2 or 3.
6.2.3.2.3 Nelson Interception Modifier: If the NELSON leader is
with the intercepting stack, one is subtracted from the die roll.
6.2.3.2.4 Intercepting Fleet Movement: If successful, the
intercepting stack must be moved to the area containing the
phasing stack that was intercepted, if not already there.
6.2.3.3 RESULT OF INTERCEPTIONS: If the interception is
successful, a naval combat is fought immediately, (i.e., during the
Naval Movement Step) using the naval combat rules (see 6.3). No
evasion by the phasing major power is possible from an
interception.
6.2.3.4 OUTCOME OF INTERCEPTION COMBAT:
6.2.3.4.1 Intercepting Side Victory: If the intercepting major
power's stack wins the naval combat, the phasing major power
must retreat its stack in accordance with the naval combat rules
(see 6.3.5), with that stack of fleets then ceasing movement after
the retreat move. In this case, the intercepting fleets may continue
to remain in the area for (possibly) intercepting other phasing
9
stacks or some or all of the victorious fleets may pursue the
defeated stack (see 6.3.5).
6.2.3.4.2 Phasing Side Victory: If the phasing stack wins the
naval combat, the intercepting stack must retreat in accordance
with the naval combat rules (see 6.3.5), and may not attempt
more interceptions during this major power's movement
sequence. Some or all of the phasing stack may pursue the
defeated stack and/or continue movement with whatever
movement points the stack's fleets retain. Of course, other fleets
can attempt to intercept the phasing fleets in every other sea area
that is entered by repeating the interception procedure.
6.2.4 INITIATION OF NAVAL COMBAT: If a phasing stack
end its movement in a sea area containing an enemy stack, it
may initiate an attack against those enemy fleets in the Naval
Combat Step (see 6.3). If a phasing stack ends movement in a
port or blockade box occupied by any enemy fleet(s), an attack
must be initiated on the enemy fleet(s). It a number of attacks are
initiated in different areas, the attacker decides the order in
which the naval combats are to be resolved.
6.2.5 NAVAL TRANSPORTATION OF ARMY CORPS
AND LEADERS: Corps and any accompanying leaders may be
transported in the Naval Phase at the rate of one corps per fleet.
Fleets may transport the corps of other major powers only if the
two major powers have declared combined movement during the
Declaration of Combined Movement Step of the Turn's Political
Phase. Guerrillas, cossacks, freikorps, insurrection corps leaders
not accompanying corps, and garrison factors may not be moved
by sea.
6.2.5.1 TRANSPORTATION MOVEMENT PROCEDURE:
The corps and the fleet must both begin in the same friendly-
controlled (it may be besieged) port. Gen 23/4 They move
together until in the sea area or blockade box adjacent to the land
area in which the corps is to land or until reaching a port. Fleets
and the corps they transport may enter other ports only if
controlled or with access.
6.2.5.2 FAILURE TO DISEMBARK: If a corps does not
disembark during the Land Phase it is destroyed. If all corps are
destroyed in this manner, any leaders with the corps are retired
from the map (see 5.3).
6.2.5.3 ELIMINATION OF TRANSPORTING FLEETS: If
fleet counters are eliminated, corps they were transporting in
excess of the number of fleets are lost. The corps so lost may not
transfer factors before being eliminated. If all corps are
destroyed in this manner, any leaders with the corps are
captured.
6.2.6 ENEMY CONTROL OF A FLEET'S PORT: If a port in
which a fleet is located becomes enemy-controlled, the fleet
must be moved immediately (this will not happen during a Naval
Phase, but during other phases and steps, including during a
Declarations of War Step) into an adjacent sea area or the port's
blockade box. Harbour defences are never used against fleets
leaving a port.
6.2.6.1: If the port is blockaded by an enemy fleet at the time,
the fleet in the port is scuttled instead and all its fleets and ships
are lost. Alternately, if desired, the blockaded fleet(s) may
choose to fight the blockading fleet(s), with the wind gauge
automatically going to the blockading fleet(s). The blockaded
fleet(s) remains in the blockade box if it wins the combat. The
blockaded fleet(s) must be scuttled if it loses the naval combat.
6.2.6.2: If NELSON is with a scuttled fleet in this situation he is
captured by the major power controlling the port.
6.2.6.3: Unlike rule 5.1.4.2, minor country and UMP major
power fleets can be scuttled under these conditions.
6.2.6.4: Each fleet scuttled causes the loss of 1 political point
(record on the POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY on the Status
Card).
6.2.6.5: A scuttled fleet counter must be repurchased during an
Economic Phase (see 8.5.4) to be brought back into the game.
6.2.7 BLOCKADE OF PORTS: A stack may only enter a
blockade box if it is at war with the major power controlling the
port or if the box or port contains an enemy fleet or enemy corps
with neutral fleets that have announced combined movement
(which makes transporting the corps possible-see 6.2.5).
6.2.7.1: If a major power begins its naval sequence with a stack
occupying a blockade box and it is not at war with the major
power controlling the port, not at war with any fleet(s) occupying
that port and/or not at war with any corps in the port area that can
be transported, then the stack must leave that blockade box during
its sequence of the Naval Phase.
6.2.7.2: If a blockade box is occupied, a stack may enter or leave
the port without interception if not at war with any of the major
powers with fleets in the blockade box. However, a fleet not at war
with any major power's fleet in the blockade box may be
intercepted if transporting a corps of a major power that is at war
with the blockading stack (or portion of the stack-see 6.3.1.2).
6.2.7.3: Fleets of a major power that are at war with blockading
fleets may enter or leave that port but may be intercepted by the
blockading enemy major power's stack (see 6.2.3.2. 1). Stacks
entering a blockade box that win any interception combats, may
then proceed into the port or out to sea (see 6.2.3).
[ 6.3 ] THE NAVAL COMBAT STEP: These same rules apply
to naval combats caused by interception (see 6.2.3) or by initiation
(see 6.2.4).
6.3.1 WHO MAY FIGHT: If enemy fleets of more than one
major power occupy a sea area, blockade box or port, only one
major powers's stack can be attacked (for this purpose, all major
powers who have declared combined movement and are at war
with the attacker are considered to be one major power). Other
major powers in the sea area, blockade box or port can be ignored
(even with combined movement declared, if not at war with the
attacker).
6.3.1.1 NAVAL ATTACKER / DEFENDER
DETERMINATION: If there is more than one enemy major
power present, the "attacker" decides which will be the "defender."
The attacker box) attack the is the phasing side if 6.2.4 applies or
the non-phasing intercepting side if the combat is caused by an
interception (see 6.2.3). The defender (at the attacker's option)
comprises any one defender's stack that is present.
6.3.1.2 WHO IS AN ENEMY: A stack may only attack another
stack if at war with the major power owning that stack, if at war
with a major power owning corps being (or that could be)
transported by fleets of that stack or more of the fleets involved in
combined movement. In the latter two cases, the attacker's stack
need not be at war with the major power owning the transporting
fleets and if not, the attacker has the option to either: Gen 27/2
6.3.1.2.1: Attack without a declaration of war (no political point
loss for a declaration of war) although political points are still
normally gained or lost for winning or losing the battle.
6.3.1.2.2: Or, immediately declare war (even if operating under an
enforced peace period, which can be ignored in this case although
the other restrictions in 4.2.2 still apply) Gen 25/4 and lose the
requisite political points (see 4.2. 1. 1) for each separate
declaration of war. No allies may be called with these declarations
of war. Even if an enforced peace period is ignored, restrictions
4.2.2.1 and 4.2.2.2 still apply. Gen 27/2
6.3.1.3 ENEMY IN A PORT: A stack may attack an enemy stack
or a neutral stack that could carry enemy corps (they are in the
same land area and have announced combined movement) in a port
city controlled by a neutral major power.
6.3.1.3.1: If the attacking stack is given access by the port's
controlling major power, the harbor defenses are not used.
6.3.1.3.2: If denied access, the phasing stack can still attack, but
the port's controlling player may use the harbor defenses. No
declaration of war is required in this case, but 6.3.1.2.1 or 6.3.1.2.2
can be applied.
6.3.1.3.3: EXCEPTION: Even if the attacker has unconditional
access (see peace term C.5 and 10.3) and/or an earlier voluntary
access agreement with the neutral major power that garrisons the
port to enter the port, if the fleet(s) being attacked belong to the
neutral major power holding the port, the harbor defenses are used
(see 10.3.2 to determine who holds a city).
6.3.2 POSSIBLE EVASIONS: The major power upon which an
attack is declared may attempt to evade unless the attack is caused
by an interception or is in a port or blockade box. If the evasion is
unsuccessful a combat will be fought. If the evasion is successful,
the phasing player may not then attempt to attack any other stack
remaining in the area.
6.3.2.1: Every time the phasing major power intends to attack a
stack, the non-phasing stack may attempt naval evasion. This is
10
done by the non-phasing stack's controlling player rolling a die.
If a 1 or 2 is rolled, the non-phasing stack evades combat and is
retreated according to the naval retreat after combat rules (see
6.3.5.1-treat the evading side as if it were the loser of a combat
and the attacking side as if it were the winner).
6.3.2.2: There are no political points for a successful evasion.
6.3.3 NAVAL COMBAT PROCEDURE:
6.3.3.1 DETERMINING THE WIND GAUGE: If combat is
to take place, the "wind gauge" must be determined. A stack
attacking in a port combat, and blockading fleets combatting
fleets exiting that blockade box's port automatically have the
wind gauge. In all other cases each side rolls one die, adding one
to the result if that side contains a British fleet and adding a
further one if NELSON is present. Notwithstanding these
modifiers, a 6 is the maximum modified result. If the net rolls
are equal, there is no wind gauge and combat is resolved
simultaneously. In any other case, the higher die roll gains the
wind gauge and conducts its attack first, removing losses
inflicted on the opponent before the opponent replies.
6.3.3.2 NAVAL COMBAT RESOLUTION: Each side rolls
one die, adding one if a British fleet is present on that side and
subtracting one if an Egyptian (See 12.12.2), Prussian and/or an
Austrian fleet is present on that side (these modifiers may cancel
each other if both are present in the same stack). The roll is
compared to the NAVAL COMBAT TABLE on the Game Card
and the result is the percentage (see the CASUALTY
PERCENTAGE TABLE on the Game Card) of that side's
number of ships, which number of ships the other side must
remove as losses.
6.3.3.3 NAVAL COMBAT IN A PORT: If combat occurs in a
port, the "harbor defenses" (see the map for harbor defense
values printed in each port's blockade box) attack the phasing
major power's fleet(s) first, using the NAVAL COMBAT
TABLE on the Game Card with an unmodified die roll. Treat
the harbor defense value number the same as if it were that many
ships for the combat. There must be a garrison in the port city
that is at war with or denied access to (see 6.3.1.3 for these
situations) an entering stack in order to use the harbor defenses.
If there is a multi-nation garrison in a port, the player with most
controlled garrison factors decides if the port guns are used. If
there’s an equal amount and they disagree, the port guns don’t
fire. If there is no garrison then the port guns do not fire. FIN &
JJ The phasing major power's surviving ships then attack the
enemy fleet(s) in that port. Finally, any surviving defending
ships make their combat die roll.
6.3.3.4 NAVAL COMBAT EXAMPLE: Great Britain and
France are at war. It is Great Britain's Naval Phase. Great
Britain moves NELSON and 3 fleets with 60 ships total into a
sea area containing 3 French fleets with 31 total ships. First,
wind gauge is determined: Great Britain rolls a 2, which
becomes a 4 after adding modifiers for NELSON and British
fleets. France rolls an unmodified 5. France wins the wind
gauge and fights first. France rolls a 5 on the Naval Combat
Table. This means 20% of the number of French ships is inflicted
as ship losses on the British. 20% of 31 is 6 ships (on the
CASUALIY PERCENTAGE TABLE, crossgrid the 20% line with
20 factors and then with 11 factors and add together to get 6).
Great Britain rolls a 2, which becomes a 3 after adding the
modifier for British fleets. This results in 8 French ship losses
(60 British ships minus 6 ships lost = 54 ships or 20 plus 20 plus
14 factors on the 15% line of the CASUALTY PERCENTAGE
TABLE = 8) being suffered by the French.
6.3.4. NAVAL VICTORY AND POLITICAL POINTS:
6.3.4.1 DETERMINING VICTORY: A side that does not lose
all of its ships and also loses less ships than the other side wins a
naval combat and the other side loses it. If both sides have
surviving ships and losses were equal, the side that attacked
loses the naval combat and the other side wins it. If a side loses
all of its ships but loses less ships than the other side a naval
combat is a draw (this can happen in port combats).
6.3.4.2 POLITICAL POW CHANGES: The victor(s) of a
naval combat gains political points and the loser loses them
(draws have no political point effects). One political point is
gained or lost for each fleet of the defeated major power(s) used
in that combat, up to a maximum of +/-3 political points.
6.3.4.2.1: If the victor was commanded by the NELSON leader,
they get +1 extra political point.
6.3.4.2.2: If the loser was commanded by the NELSON leader,
they lose -1 extra political point.
6.3.5 NAVAL RETREAT AND PURSUIT: The survivors of one
side in a naval combat must retreat. Retreat moves are always
made before pursuit moves and the retreat and pursuit moves of
one naval combat must be made before the next naval combat is
resolved.
6.3.5.1 SEA AREA RETREATS AND PURSUITS: The naval
combat loser retreats all fleets that were in the combat to the one
nearest unblockaded friendly (including an ally's port, with access
permission and if the loser wishes to use it) port within seven
movement points (losing player's choice if more than one possible
port is equally close). Some, none or all of the victorious fleet(s)
may pursue to follow the losing fleets and blockade that port.
6.3.5.1.1: If no eligible port is available, or at the loser's option, the
loser retreats to any one adjacent sea area of the victor's choice (a
sea area into which movement is not possible may not be selected).
Retreating or pursuing fleets may not be intercepted. In this case
there is no pursuit and the victor remains in the area where the
combat occurred.
6.3.5.1.2: A fleet may neither retreat nor pursue into or through a
sea area north of the ice line during winter or into or through the
Dardanelles sea area without the permission of the major power
controlling Constantinople (if any).
6.3.5.2 PORT RETREATS: If the naval combat takes place in a
port, the attacking fleets (win or lose) must always retreat to the
port's blockade box, and the defending fleets remain in the port (no
pursuit).
7.0 THE LAND PHASE
[ 7.1 ] THE LAND PHASE SEQUENCE: At the beginning of
this phase France announces when in the following sequence he
will be moving. The other major powers move in this order:
Russia, Turkey, Austria, Prussia, Great Britain, Spain.
7.1.1 MINOR FREE STATE SEQUENCE: All land forces of
minor Free States move in the sequence of their controlling major
power.
7.1.2 COMBINED MOVE SEQUENCE: In order for a major
power to move in the sequence of another major power, those
major powers must be allies and must have announced combined
movement during the Political Phase. Combined movement is
conducted in the sequence of the ally who would have moved last
in the phase.
7.1.3 LAND PHASE STEPS: Each major power sequence of the
Land Phase is divided into Depot Creation/Removal, Land
Movement, Supply, Land Combat and Guerrilla Steps. Each player
completes all these steps during his major power sequence before
the next player commences his major power sequence. The player
his sequence and his counters are described as "phasing" during
that time and all other players and their counters are called "non-
phasing." After all major powers have completed their sequences,
the Conquest Step is simultaneously resolved.
[ 7.2 ] THE DEPOT CREATION/REMOVAL STEP: Major
powers may remove any of their depots, destroying any garrisons
on a removed depot unless there is an unbesieged friendly
controlled or vacant city in that same area to which they can be
transferred. Major powers may then purchase and place new
depots, up to counter mix limits on the map at any one time, at the
cost of one money point each. The same depots may be removed,
then placed, etc. any number of times during the course of a game
as long as one money point is paid every time one is placed and the
countermix limits are not exceeded-the same depot counter may be
removed and then placed elsewhere (at a one money point cost)
during the same Depot Creation/Removal Step. Free State forces
use the depots of their controlling major power. Depots may not be
placed in areas containing unbesieged enemy corps, guerrillas,
freikorps or cossacks (unless an unbesieged corps of the major
power placing the depot is also in that area) or in an area which
11
6.3.5.3 BLOCKADE BOX RETREATS AND PURSUITS: If
the naval combat takes place in a blockade box the loser must
retreat to that port, if and only if, the combat resulted from the
movement of the loser's stack from that port, and in any other
case must retreat in accordance with sea area retreat rules (see
6.3.5.1). Pursuit is the same as a sea area pursuit. EXCEPTION:
Since movement between a blockade box and its port is free (see
6.2.1.2), the victor (even if the phasing side with all movement
expended) in a blockade box naval combat may be, if the port is
friendly or with access permission, moved into the port
following the naval combat.
6.3.5.4 NAVAL RETREAT AND PURSUIT EXAMPLE:
Continuing the example from 6.3.3.4; as the French Player lost
(8 ships lost to 6) he must retreat to the nearest unblockaded
friendly-controlled port within seven movement points or be
moved by the British to an adjacent sea area. Great Britain gains
4 political points for the win (including +1 extra for NELSON),
and France loses 3 political points because the loser had 3 fleets.
France decides to retreat to a nearby home nation port and Great
Britain decides to follow up and blockade that port.
6.3.6 CONSOLIDATION OF LOSSES: After ships lost in
combat are removed, excess fleet counters (those without ships)
are removed from the map. No political points are lost for
removing these empty fleets. If during naval combat or as a
result of transfer, a fleet is left without ships, it is removed from
the map and must be repurchased during an Economic Phase
(see 8.5.4) to be brought back into the game. If NELSON is with
a stack in which all ships and fleets are eliminated by naval
combat, NELSON becomes a prisoner of the other side in the
naval combat.
already contains a depot (there is a limit of one depot per area-
EXCEPTION: see 7.2.2). Depots may be placed only in the
following areas:
7.2.1 DEPOT IN A FRIENDLY CITY AREA: A new depot
may be placed in an area containing a friendly controlled
unbesieged city, in that major power's territory.
7.2.2 * DEPOT INSIDE A FRIENDLY PORT OR IN A
PORT AREA: Even if not itself a supply source or part of an
overland supply chain, a new depot may be placed in an area
containing an unblockaded friendly controlled port, provided
there exists a friendly unblockaded sea supply source (see 7.4.3)
to the port.
7.2.2.1: If such a port is besieged, then the depot is placed in the
port city itself. This is the only case where the depot is
considered to be in a city rather than in the surrounding area.
7.2.2.2: Another, enemy depot could also be placed in the port
city's area while a depot is also in the port city itself. This is the
only case where two depots may be located in the same area
(actually, one in the city and one in the area).
7.2.3 DEPOTS IN SUPPLY CHAINS: A new depot may be
placed within two unblocked areas of an already existing (before
this Turn) depot that is a supply source or which is part of a valid
supply chain.
7.2.3.1 SUPPLY SOURCE DEFINITION: A "supply source"
is any unbesieged controlled city area in a major power s home
nation or controlled minor country that is unoccupied by enemy
forces and that contains a depot.
7.2.3.2 SUPPLY CHAIN DEFINITION: A "supply chain" is a
series of one major power's depots that are placed no more than
two areas apart and lead back to a supply source of that major
power.
7.2.3.2.1: A "valid" supply chain is one where the intervening
areas between any of a supply chain's depots are not blocked by
the presence of unbesieged enemy corps, garrisons, guerrillas,
cossacks and/or freikorps (EXCEPTION: these enemy forces do
not block an area if that area also contains an unbesieged
friendly corps or garrison).
7.2.3.2.2: A valid supply chain may only be traced across sea
areas via sea supply (see 7.4.3). A valid supply chain may be
traced across sea crossing arrows unless the surrounding sea area
contains an enemy fleet(s).
7.2.3.2.3: Any portion of a supply chain that is not valid cannot be
used for regular supply (see 7.4.2), although the invalid depots do
not have to be removed.
7.2.3.3 SUPPLY CHAIN RESTRICTIONS:
7.2.3.3.1: New depots as part of a supply chain may not be placed
in a minor neutral unless the major power is at war with the neutral
and may only be placed in the territory of another major power if
given access permission by, at war with, or having imposed victory
condition C.5 (see 4.5.2) on that major power.
7.2.3.3.1.1: Supply can be traced over a territory owned by
neutral major party but such an action is considered as
forcible access. (See 10.3.4 Forcible Access.) FIN
7.2.3.3.2: For a major power to place a new depot outside of its
own territory, an unbesieged corps of that major power must be in
that area.
7.2.3.3.3: Depots from different major powers, even if allied, may
not combine to form one supply chain (including sea supply or
invasion supply).
7.2.4 * DEPOTS ON FLEETS: Depots may be placed on fleets,'
for the provision of invasion supply (see 7.4.4).
[ 7.3 ] THE LAND MOVEMENT STEP: Major powers may
move any or all of their corps, cossacks, freikorps or guerrillas
during their sequence. Free State corps are moved at the same
time by the controlling major power and are not limited to
movement within their minor Free State. Movement may be
restricted through other major powers' territory (see 10.3).
Movement allowances may not be transferred from unit to unit nor
may they be accumulated from Turn to Turn.
7.3.1 GENERAL LAND MOVEMENT RULES: Each land
counter has a "movement allowance" consisting of a number of
"movement points" that can be expended to enter new areas on the
map.
7.3.1.1 MOVEMENT ALLOWANCES: With corps bearing a
cavalry symbol (including Austrian light infantry), Austrian and
Prussian freikorps and Russian cossacks the movement allowance
is 5. For French corps (including French artillery) and French
controlled minor Free State corps having an infantry symbol and
having their 3 movement allowance number in parenthesis the
allowance is 4. All other corps have an allowance of 3. Spanish
guerrillas have a movement allowance of one area (regardless of
terrain).
7.3.1.2 FORCE MARCHING: Corps may increase their
movement allowance by one movement point by "force marching."
Cossacks, freikorps, guerrillas, cavalry corps and disembarking
corps may not force march. Gen 23/4
7.3.1.3 LAND MOVEMENT COSTS: Each map area generally
expends one movement point from a counter's movement
allowance to enter, although this varies in some areas, as follows:
7.3.1.3.1 Marsh or Mountain: Areas containing a marsh or a
mountain cost 2 movement points to enter.
7.3.1.3.2 Crossing Rivers: It costs an extra movement point to
enter an area across a river, if that area contains an unbesieged
enemy corps. There is no extra cost to move across a river if there
is no unbesieged enemy corps counter(s) in the area.
7.3.1.3.3 Sea Crossing Arrow Movement: It always costs an
extra movement point to use a crossing arrow. Corps, freikorps
and/or cossacks may not use a crossing arrow if an enemy fleet
occupies the surrounding sea area.
7.3.1.3.4 Cumulative Costs: These costs are all cumulative. For
example, movement across a river into a mountain area containing
an enemy corps costs one movement point to cross the river, plus
two more movement points since it is a mountain area, for a total
of three movement points of the counter's movement allowance
expended.
7.3.1.4 FORAGING WHILE MOVING: Although the rules are
covered in the Supply Step, foraging (see 7.4.1) is performed while
corps are being moved.
7.3.2 LAND MOVEMENT PROCEDURES: Each counter is
moved individually.
7.3.2.1: A corps must cease movement when it consumes its
movement allowance or when it enters an area containing an
12
unbesieged enemy corps (not if the area contains only cossacks,
freikorps, guerrillas and/or garrisons).
7.3.2.2: Cossacks and/or freikorps are not required to cease
movement when they enter an area containing enemy forces.
7.3.2.3: No counter may be moved into an area that would cost
more movement points than the counter has remaining for use.
7.3.2.4: Movement may be ended earlier-there is no requirement
to move any counter nor for any counter to expend its full
movement allowance.
7.3.3 MOVING INTO CITIES-DETACHING/ABSORBING
FACTORS-GARRISONS: During a major power's Land
Movement Step, any non-artillery, non-feudal or non-
insurrection corps may detach factors as garrisons at, or absorb
army factors from, depots hnd/or unbesieged friendly or vacant
cities by reducing or increasing its strength, if the capacity is
there. There is no movement point cost for doing this.
7.3.3.1 DETACHING/ABSORBING FACTORS
RESTRICTIONS: Regular infantry and/or militia factors may
not be detached or absorbed in an area containing enemy corps
outside a city.
7.3.3.1.1: Minor Free State forces may only detach and absorb
their infantry factors to and from cities and/or depots within their
own country.
7.3.3.1.2: Detachments cannot empty a corps. All corps must
always contain at least one army factor to maintain the corps
counter on the map-corps counters may be removed only due to
5.2.3/5.2.4, 7.3.5, 7.4.1 or 7.5.5 and at those times.
7.3.3.2 CONVERTING ARMY FACTORS: Regular cavalry
and guard factors detached to serve as garrisons must be
converted to regular infantry factors for the remainder of the
game; artillery factors may not be detached.
7.3.3.3 GARRISON FACTORS: Garrison factors can be
regular infantry and/or militia factors, represented by the
placement of garrison/strength counters of the appropriate
strength and type on the city or depot concerned. Each major
power must use counters of its own color (see 1.2) for garrison
purposes outside the major power's borders. The gray
garrison/strength counters must be used for minor Free States
inside their own borders and may be also be used inside a major
power's home nation territory to represent that major power's
garrisons if insufficient counters of the appropriate color are
available. This is why some small grey counters are militia.
7.3.3.3.1: Cossack, freikorps and guerrillas factors (guerrillas
may not garrison depots) may also be used to form all or part of
a city or depot garrison.
7.3.3.3.2: Corps may form all or part of a city garrison without
detaching army factors, so that any types of army factors in such
corps could also be a garrison.
7.3.3.4 CITY GARRISON CAPACITIES: A city's maximum
garrison capacity is 5 times its supply value (e.g., a city with a
supply value of 4 - it has four spires on its map picture-may
contain up to 20 army factors). A city may also hold any number
of leaders (NOTE: leaders may only be moved into a city with
corps counters, although they may remain there-must remain
there if the city is besieged-after the corps counters are
eliminated).
7.3.3.5 DEPOT GARRISON CAPACITY: A depot's
maximum garrison capacity is 10 army factors.
7.3.3.5.1: All army factors/corps used to garrison a depot must
be of the same major power as the depot.
7.3.3.5.2: Controlled minor Free State factors may be used to
garrison any of its major power's depots only within the minor
Free State's borders.
7.3.3.5.3: A depot in a besieged port city (see 7.2.2) does not add
any garrison capacity to the city-the port city/depot combination
has the same capacity as just the city alone.
7.3.4 MOVEMENT FROM CITIES: If a phasing major power
has corps, cossacks, freikorps and/or guerrillas inside a city
which is not being besieged, they may be moved directly out of
that city into the area surrounding the city and/or continue
normal movement into adjacent areas (if permissible). Moving
from a city into its area (or vice-versa) expends no movement
points.
7.3.5 * LANDING FROM SHIPS-"DISEMIBARKING":
Corps being transported on fleets at sea (see 6.2.5) must be
"disembarked" into any adjacent land area during their Land
Movement Step or be eliminated. Corps being transported on fleets
that moved into a port must disembark in the port's area. When
disembarking from fleets located in a blockade box, corps must
land in the area containing that blockade box's port. Disembarking
exhausts a corps, entire movement allowance for all purposes, and
counts the same as having crossed a river for purposes of any
combat in that area during the disembarking player's sequence (see
7.5.2.7.1). If an area contains a friendly port that is besieged,
counters may be considered to be disembarked directly into the
port (if there is room) or into the port's area, as the controlling
player desires. Gen 23.4
7.3.6 MOVING INTO AN ENEMY DEPOT AREA:
7.3.6.1 UNGARRISONED DEPOT AREA: If during movement
a corps, cossack, freikorps or guerrilla moves into an area
containing an ungarrisoned enemy depot, it may elect to destroy
the depot. If it does destroy the depot and ends its movement in
that area, then having destroyed the depot counts as having
successfully foraged for supply (with no loss) for that one corps
counter. An alternative to destroying a depot is to convert (remove
the enemy depot and replace it with one of the entering power's
depots-there is no money cost for this conversion) it to a friendly
depot if that would make it a supply source or an extension of a
friendly valid supply chain (see 7.2.3).
7.3.6.2 GARRISONED DEPOT AREA: If an enemy depot is
garrisoned, the player controlling the garrison factors has the
option of immediately destroying the depot before the moving
force chooses whether to leave the area (if permissible) or to stay
and fight. If the garrison does not elect to destroy the depot and the
phasing force chooses to stop its movement and fight, the depot
may be captured after land combat (see 7.3.6. 1) and destroyed or
converted (but not used for supply this major power's sequence-
also see 7.5.2.14). If the garrison destroys the depot, the garrison
surrenders or all or part (if city cannot hold all-the part not moved
to the city will surrender) can be moved to an unbesieged friendly
controlled or vacant city in that same area, at the owning player's
option.
7.3.7 MOVING INTO COMBAT:
7.3.7.1 ENEMY CORPS OR CITY GARRISON IN AREA: If
during movement a corps moves into an area containing enemy
corps not in a city, the corps must cease movement and declare an
attack. If enemy corps and/or garrison factors are in a city the
phasing corps may continue movement or stop movement and
besiege (see 7.5.4) or not, as the owning player desires. If he
decides to besiege the enemy corps and forages for supply, the
foraging die roll is not reduced due to unconsumed movement
points (see 7.3.2). If any friendly forces in an area besiege enemy
forces then all friendly forces in that area (except depot garrisons)
must besiege the enemy forces.
7.3.7.2 ENEMY COSSACK, FREIKORPS OR DEPOT
GARRISON IN AREA: If a corps ends its movement in an area
containing an only enemy cossacks, freikorps and/or depot
garrison factors it must declare an attack. A corps may move
through such an area without stopping or declaring an attack.
7.3.8 * DECLARATION OF COMBAT AND COMBINED
MOVEMENT: To avoid problems when moving into combat the
following step sequence must be followed whenever moving into
an area containing two or more forces or when using combined
movement (see 4.9).
7.3.8.1 STEP ONE: All allies who are using combined movement,
although moving in the same major power sequence, must decide
in which order they will move within this sequence. If agreement
cannot be reached, let competitive die rolls decide.
7.3.8.2 STEP TWO: The phasing major power (the first ally in the
case of combined movement) moves all his forces normally and
must declare an attack against all field forces (corps that have not
moved into cities or cossacks, freikorps and/or depot garrisons in
the last area entered) with which he is at war, in each area that also
contains his field forces.
7.3.8.3 STEP THREE: Major powers who have field forces in an
area in which a combat has been declared against an ally, may now
declare war (if not already at war and if not restricted-see 4.2.2) on
the attacker, losing the appropriate political points (see 4.2.1.1 -
record on the POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY on the Status
Card) per separate declaration of war. No allies can be called for
13
these declarations of war. These major powers are now classed
as the "defenders" and fight the combat as one force.
7.3.8.4 STEP FOUR: All major powers not at war with the
attacker (except the attacker and his allies at war with the
defender and factors in cities or on depots) must now leave the
area, moving to any adjacent area that, if possible, is closer or at
least as close to their source of supply as the area they leave.
7.3.8.5 STEP FIVE: Now the second combined movement ally
(if there is one) follows the procedures outlined in Steps 2-4 but
may not enter an area containing forces of the first ally unless it
is an area where no attack has been declared or the second ally is
at war with all the defending major powers in that area. This ally
now becomes an attacker (joining the first ally in the attack).
7.3.8.6 STEP SIX: Repeat Step 5 until all the combined
movement allies have moved. Now every ally of the phasing
major power(s) who is in an area where an attack has been
declared and is at war with all the defending major powers may
stay and participate as an attacker. Otherwise they must leave the
area, moving to an adjacent area closer to their sources of
supply.
7.3.8.7 STEP SEVEN: This will now leave just two forces in
every area where an attack has been declared, the attacking force
(the original attacker and his allies) and the defending force (as
found in Step 3). Garrison army factors (including those on
depots) of a major power that is not involved in the combat may
remain in the area but are ignored for combat purposes.
[ 7.4 ] THE SUPPLY STEP: Only corps and besieged forces
must be supplied. Leaders and unbesieged cossacks, freikorps,
guerrillas and garrisons do not need supply.
7.4.1 FORAGING: "Foraging" represents living off the country.
When a corps ceases movement it may elect (or be forced) to
"forage" rather than use depot supply. If it has force marched, or
is four or more areas from the nearest depot in a friendly valid
supply chain, not adjacent to an invasion supply depot and/or
supply source or no money is available for depot supply then it
must forage for supply.
7.4.1.1 FORAGING PROCEDURE: A die is rolled for each
foraging corps as it completes movement (but after resolving any
7.3.8 procedures that may be caused by its movement). This die
roll is modified as in 7.4.1.2, if any modifiers apply. The
modified die result is than compared with the forage value of the
area with the lowest forage value of all the areas passed through
or stopped in, not counting the area in which the corps started
(unless the corps did not move and remained in one area), during
its Land Movement Step. If the modified die result is equal to or
less than this forage value, there is no effect. For each modified
die point above the forage value, the corps must lose one army
factor.
7.4.1.2 FORAGING MODIFIERS: When the die is rolled for a
foraging corps, the following cumulative modifiers may apply:
7.4.1.2.1 Other Corps In The Area: For each other unbesieged
corps in the area it currently occupies, whether that major
power's or not (including friendly and enemy corps and corps
which have, and corps which have not, already moved during
this step), +1 is added to the result of the die, up to a maximum
of +2. NOTE: This does not include corps that leave the area as a
result of the 7.3.8 procedures.
7.4.1.2.2 Unused Movement Points: For each movement point
the corps did not use, one is subtracted from the die.
EXCEPTION: The die is not modified due to unused movement
points if the corps is besieging or plans to besiege enemy forces
in the area.
7.4.1.2.3 Force Marching: If the corps force marched, +1 is
added to the die roll.
7.4.1.2.4 Winter: If it is winter +2 is added to the die roll unless
the corps is not in the "winter zone" (see 9.0).
7.4.1.2.5 In Own Territory: If the corps did not move into an
area outside the major power's territory this Turn and is not now
in such an area, -1 is subtracted from the die roll. Gen 25/4
7.4.1.3 FORAGING LOSSES: The factor or factors removed
for foraging losses may be any in the corps of the controlling
player's choice, with these restrictions:
7.4.1.3.1: Any factors that were part of the corps during its
movement are eligible to be used for forage losses. If possible,
forage losses must come out of the factors actually in the corps
when movement is completed.
7.4.1.3.2: Corps counters may be removed as a result of forage
losses only if all factors that were part of the corps during its
movement are lost to foraging. If only one factor remains after
foraging losses are removed, that factor must be in the corps and
the corps counter must be left on the map. For example, a corps
with three regular infantry factors detaches two of these factors
into a city in an area passed through and then rolls a loss of two
factors while foraging. Since the corps can only be removed if all
factors are lost, the two detached factors would have to be the ones
lost. If the corps had started with five factors, the two forage losses
would come out of the corps (leaving one factor in the corps) and
the two detached factors would remain in their city. If the corps
had started with four factors, one of the forage losses would have
to come out Of the corps (leaving one factor in the corps) and the
other loss would have to be one of the detached factors.
7.4.1.3.3: If all corps counters in an area are removed due to
foraging losses, any leaders with the removed corps are
immediately removed from the map. They may be returned to the
map during any later Army Reinforcement Step (see 5.3).
7.4.2 REGULAR (DEPOT) SUPPLY: After the movement and
foraging of corps is complete, any corps which did not forage must
now pay for supply. Depot supply, while costing money prevents
army factors being lost. Paying for depot supply is as follows:
7.4.2.1 PAYING FOR DEPOT SUPPLY: Any corps in a depot
area or which can trace an unblocked route to a depot may use
depot supply. Besieged port city garrisons (regardless of size) may
also use depot supply (see 7.4.3 and 7.4.4). The costs for all corps
and separate garrisons are summed and any fraction rounded up,
that amount then being deducted from that major power's current
monetary total. A major power may not use depot supply for a
corps if it doesn't have enough money to pay the cost and such
corps must instead forage for supply.
7.4.2.1.1 Corps Depot Supply: A corps in the same area as a
depot being part of a valid supply chain costs half a money point to
supply. Other corps up to 3 unblocked areas away from a depot
pay the number of areas they are away from a depot in a valid
supply chain in money points. For example, a corps 3 areas away
pays 3 money points to get supply. The route through intervening
areas traced from a corps to a depot may not be blocked by forces
(same rules as for blocking a supply chain (see 7.2.3.2.1).
7.4.2.1.2 Besieged Port Garrison Depot Supply: Besieged port
city garrisons using sea supply through a depot in the port city cost
half a money point per garrison to supply. Besieged port city
garrisons using invasion supply cost one money point per garrison
to supply as they are in an adjacent area.
7.4.2.1.3 Winter Depot Supply Cost Increases: All costs are
doubled in winter for corps or garrisons within the winter zone
(see 9.0).
7.4.2.2 ALLIED DEPOT SUPPLY: Major powers may have
their forces live off the depots and/or supply chains of their allies,
but those allies must pay the costs involved. Naturally, permission
is required for this.
7.4.3 * SEA SUPPLY: All or a portion of supply chain can be
validly traced across sea areas.
7.4.3.1 TRACING SEA SUPPLY: In order trace supply across
sea areas there must be one of a major power's depots in each of
the two friendly controlled ports or port areas between which
supply is to be traced. At least one of these ports must contain a
fleet(s) of the major power and/or an ally and that port must be a
supply source or be able to trace a valid supply chain via depots to
a supply source. Neither port may be blockaded. If these
conditions are fulfilled, the ports are valid links in a supply chain.
The effect of this is as if the depots were in adjacent areas
(regardless of the number of sea areas actually between them) for
all purposes including placement of reinforcements.
7.4.3.2 BLOCKING SEA SUPPLY: Apart from fleets in the
blockade boxes of ports used for sea supply, enemy fleets do not
interrupt such a sea supply chain.
7.4.3.3 DARDANELLES/ICE LINE SUPPLY EFFECTS: Sea
supply may not be traced into or through the Dardanelles sea area
without the permission of the major power controlling
Constantinople (if any) nor into or out of an area north of the ice
line during winter months.
14
7.4.3.4 PORT CITY SUPPLY: Depots may be constructed in
an unblockaded friendly controlled port even if besieged
provided there exists a friendly unblockaded sea supply source
(see 7.2.2).
7.4.3.4.1: This allows forces in that port to live off sea supply
(rather than besieged supply).
7.4.3.4.2: This is the only case where depots are considered to be
inside the city, rather than in the surrounding area.
7.4.3.4.3: At the end of a player's Movement Step a depot in a
port city is moved into the surrounding area if the city is no
longer besieged. If there is already an enemy depot in the
surrounding area, the enemy depot is destroyed.
7.4.3.4.4: A depot in a port city is immediately removed when
there is no longer an unblockaded sea supply source.
7.4.3.4.5: A depot in a port city may be immediately destroyed
or converted to a friendly supply depot (if it would then be part
of a valid supply chain) and moved into the surrounding area
when the forces in the city accept honors of war, surrender,
and/or are eliminated.
7.4.4 INVASION SUPPLY: A depot may be constructed on a
fleet of the same power as the depot Gen 25/4 in a sea area and
used to provide supply for all corps and/or besieged port city
garrisons into all adjacent land areas (but not beyond) at the
normal depot supply money point costs. Although this is
normally used to supply disembarking corps, it can be used
without the need for an actual "invasion" (disembarking corps).
7.4.4.1: Invasion supply can only be used if an unblockaded
friendly controlled port that is a supply source or contains a
depot that is part of a valid supply chain exists from which
supply can be traced to the fleet.
7.4.4.2: If the fleet containing the depot should move for any
reason, the depot is lost.
7.4.4.3: Invasion supply does not allow reinforcements to be
placed, nor can it be a link in a chain of supply-it only directly
supplies corps in adjacent land areas.
7.4.4.4: No more than one depot for invasion supply may be
placed in any one sea area.
7.4.4.5: Invasion supply is not possible in a sea area north of the
ice line during winter months.
7.4.4.6: If the route from the port to the fleet must go into or
through the Dardanelles sea area, the permission of the major
power controlling the area (if any-see 10.7) is required.
7.4.5 BESIEGED SUPPLY: Unless eligible for sea or invasion
supply, besieged garrisons and corps must check for supply by
the foraging method, using the city supply value (which equals
the number of spires in the city picture) rather than the forage
value of the area containing the city.
7.4.5.1 BESIEGED SUPPLY DIE MODIFIER: The foraging
die roll modifiers are not used for besieged supply. Instead, for
every full 5 army factors in the besieged city (regardless of
whether the factors are part of a corps or merely a garrison) +1 is
added to the die, to a maximum of +2. For example, a city with
5-9 army factors would have +1 added to the die roll. No other
modifiers apply.
7.4.5.2 BESIEGED FORAGING LOSSES: For each point of
the die roll over the city supply value, one army factor of the
besieged garrison and/or corps is lost. If all the besieged army
factors are lost, any besieged leaders become the prisoners of the
besiegers and the besieging forces may immediately detach
factors to control the city. NOTE: Unbesieged corps in a city use
the forage value of the area in which they are in, not the city
supply value.
7.4.5.3 BESIEGING FORCES: Besieging forces may live off
regular supply or forage. If they forage they are considered to
have spent their full movement allowance before dicing for
supply and use the area supply value and normal modifiers. This
occurs even if it is the first Turn of the siege.
[ 7.5 ] THE LAND COMBAT STEP: At the end of all
movement and supply in a player's sequence the land combat
procedure commences.
7.5.1 GENERAL RULES OF LAND COMBAT: If at the end
of all movement of the phasing major power, enemy forces
(excluding guerrillas-see 10.1.1.3) occupy the same area as its
corps, freikorps or cossacks, the phasing major power must
attack in those areas (also see 7.3.7 and 7.3.8). The phasing side is
the "attacker" and the non-phasing side is the "defender."
7.5.1.1 DEFENDER RETIREMENT INTO CITY: Any forces
or portion of forces upon whom an attack is declared may
immediately retire into any friendly controlled or vacant, and
unbesieged city in that area but not so as to exceed that city's
garrison capacity
7.5.1.1.1: If there are several defending major powers wishing to
retire into the city than agreement must be reached on who shall
retire into the city. If no agreement can be reached, then none may
retire.
7.5.1.1.2: If they all do so retire, the attackers may, if desired, be
placed on top of the forces and a siege occurs.
7.5.1.1.3: If any portion of a defending force does not retire into a
city, the attack continues against that portion.
7.5.1.1.4: A city must be able to hold all of the factors of entire
corps that move in (plus any other factors that may be in or moved
into the city).
7.5.1.2 WHO MAY PARTICIPATE IN LAND COMBATS: All
corps, cossacks, freikorps, depot garrisons, and attacking guerrillas
in an area participate in field or trivial combat in the area. Forces
inside cities are not included in field or trivial combat (they may
only attack or be attacked via siege combat, see 7.5.4).
7.5.1.3 GENERAL SEQUENCE OF LAND COMBATS: All
field, limited field and/or trivial combats may be resolved in any
order at the phasing player's option. After a combat is completed,
the phasing player's forces may immediately occupy and/or detach
factors to occupy any friendly-controlled or vacant city in the area
subject to usual restrictions (see 7.3.3). The phasing player's forces
then conduct all siege combats (this can include forces which just
took part in a field or trivial combat-see 7.5.4) in any desired
order.
7.5.2 FIELD COMBAT PROCEDURE: Field combats simulate
open-field battles. Individual field combats may be resolved in any
order determined by the phasing player, and may be intermixed
with any limited field and/or trivial combats. A combat in one area
must be completed before commencing another combat. A
complete example of a field combat is found in 7.5.2.15. Each
individual field combat occurs in the following order:
7.5.2.1 STEP ONE-SELECTION OF CHITS: Both players
select an Operational Possibilities chit. There are different chits for
the attacker (gray) and the defender (white). An outflank chit may
be chosen only if a force consists of at least two non-artillery corps
and has a leader.
7.5.2.2 STEP TWO-OUTFLANK ANNOUNCEMENT: Each
player declares whether or not he has picked the outflank chit. If
both players or neither player picked the outflank chit, or if the
attacking player picked the outflank chit and the defending player
picked the cordon chit skip Step 3 and go directly to Step 4.
7.5.2.3 STEP THREE-DIVIDING AN OUTFLANKING
FORCE: The player who picked the outflank chit must divide his
forces into a "pinning" and an "outflanking" force.
7.5.2.3.1 Pinning Force Composition: The player designates part
of his force (at least one non-artillery corps plus all leaders, all
garrison factors on depots, artillery factors and attacking guerrillas)
as the "pinning force" before the other side reveals its tactical chit-
only these will fight until the arrival of the outflanking force.
7.5.2.3.2 Outflanking Force Composition: The rest, comprising
of at least one corps plus all cossacks and/or freikorps, are
considered to be "moving around the flank" and are not included
for combat purposes (which includes cavalry superiority-see
option 12.3.3.1) until they "arrive." EXCEPTION: They are
included for determination of the base morale levels (see 7.5.2.6).
7.5.2.4 STEP FOUR-REVEAL CHITS: Both players now reveal
their chosen chits, and cross-index their operational possibilities
chits on the OPERATIONAL POSSIBILITIES CHART on the
Game Card. If the defender did not choose "Withdraw", skip Step
5 and go directly to Step 6.
7.5.2.5 STEP FIVE-RESOLVE WITHDRAWALS: Any player
who chose "Withdraw" now dices to see if his force does
withdraw.
7.5.2.5.1 Withdrawal Avoids Battle: If the entire force does
withdraw, skip Steps 6-13 and go directly to Step 14.
7.5.2.5.2 Withdrawal Procedure: If a player has picked the
"Withdraw" chit, he dices to determine if he successfully
15
withdraws. To be successful the die roll must be less than or
equal to the appropriate strategic rating.
7.5.2.5.2.1: If the opposing side has chosen "Probe", the
withdrawal is automatically successful and no die roll is
necessary.
7.5.2.5.2.2: If some other chit has been chosen by the
attacker then the defending player rolls a die, comparing
the result to his commander's strategic rating (see 10.6.1.1
for determining a commander)..If he has no commander,
each corps must be diced for separately, comparing the
roll to its intrinsic strategic rating. These strategic ratings
may be modified by notes on the OPERATIONAL
POSSIBILITIES CHART on the Game Card. Cossacks
and freikorps that are with corps attempting to withdraw
may attempt to withdraw with them using the rules in
10.1.2.2.3 for their withdrawal. Guerrillas do not need to
withdraw. Also see 7.5.2.12.2 for withdrawing from an
outflanking force.
7.5.2.5.2.3: Each corps which withdraws is retreated by
the method given in Retreat after Combat (see 7.5.2.10.3),
except that the retreat is conducted by the controlling
player. There is no pursuit. If any corps, depot garrison
and/or cossack and/or freikorps remains, the combat is
fought on the combat tables found on the
OPERATIONAL POSSIBILITIES CHART.
7.5.2.6 STEP SIX-REVEAL FORCES/MORALE LEVELS:
Both players reveal their forces and determine their final morale
levels.
7.5.2.6.1 Determining Morale Levels: Morale levels represent a
force's "morale", and the higher the number the better. "Base
morale levels" can be calculated by one of two methods. Players
should decide before the game begins which method to use for
their game. Also see the NATIONAL MORALE VALUES
CHART on the Game Card.
7.5.2.6.1.1 Method One: The base morale level is
calculated by adding up the products of the number of
army factors having the same morale value, and dividing
this total by the total number of army factors and
rounding up to the next tenth of a point. Guerrillas,
freikorps and cossacks may be included in combat with a
morale value of 1.0. Militia are included with a morale
value of 2.0. Artillery are included with the morale of the
major power's regular infantry. Guard infantry have a
morale value of 5.0. Other infantry and cavalry have their
morale values indicated on the back of their corps
counters. For example, if a force of 51 total army factors
has 21 factors at morale 3.0, 20 factors at morale 4.0 and
10 factors at morale 5.0 this is: 21 times 3 plus 20 times 4
plus 10 times 5 = 193 divided by 51 factors=3.784 which
rounds to a base morale level of 3.8.
7.5.2.6.1.2 Method Two: Method One for the
determination of the base morale level of a force can be
involved and almost certainly involves the use of a pocket
calculator. Therefore, we offer this simpler (and faster)
alternative; first, determine the "primary component" of
the force. This will be that major power with the most
corps present, including controlled minor Free State corps
(with equal numbers of corps present, the primary
component is that major power with the lowest basic
morale). The "basic morale" of this primary component
provides the base number for determining the base morale
level of the whole force. The basic morales are: Great
Britain-4.5; France-4.0; Russia, Austria and Prussia-3.5;
Spain and Turkey-3.0 (also see the NATIONAL
MORALE VALUES CHART on the Game Card). The
basic morale is increased by + 0.1 for every guard factor
and reduced by 0.1 for every militia, cossack, freikorps,
guerrilla, feudal or minor Free State infantry or cavalry
factor with a morale value of 2.0 or less (see the backs of
the minor country corps counters) in the force, even if not
in the primary component. The basic morale may not be
increased by more than a net +0.5 nor decreased by more
than a net 1.0. This is the base morale level of the force.
For example, Austria has an army composed of 3 Guard,
28 regular infantry and 6 militia. Its basic morale is 3.5
 plus 0.3 (3 Guard factors) minus 0.6 (6 militia factors 3.2
base morale level.
For our game we will use Method One only.
7.5.2.6.2 Final Morale Levels: The final morale level for each day
is the base morale level minus 0.5 for each succeeding day of the
combat after the first and any modifiers indicated on the
OPERATIONAL POSSIBILITIES CHART on the Game Card.
The final morale level is the point at which the force will break.
For example, a force with a base morale level of 3.2 will also use
that figure for its final morale level on the first day of a combat.
On the second day of a combat, the final morale level will be 3.2
minus 0.5 equals 2.7
7.5.2.6.3 Reveal Forces: Both sides simultaneously reveal corps
identities, the exact size and composition of their forces and their
final morale levels.
7.5.2.7 STEP SEVEN-FIND COMBAT TABLES: The
OPERATIONAL POSSIBILITIES CHART refers each player to a
series of three sets of combat tables on the COMBAT
RESOLUTION CHART (both on the Game Card). One combat
table is used per player per round for the three rounds for which a
combat day lasts. The attacker uses those tables designated by A in
the OPERATIONAL POSSIBILITIES CHART. The defender uses
those tables designated by D. For example, if the attacker selected
the echelon chit and the defender selected the counterattack chit,
the attacker's combat tables would be 1-2 (first round), 3-4 (second
round) and 2-4 (third round) and the defender's combat tables
would be 3-1, 4-1 and 2-1. Each combat table is identified by two
numbers (ie., 3-1 ). The first number represents the casualty level
and the second number represents the morale level of the combat
table and these levels are cross-indexed on the COMBAT
RESOLUTION CHART to find the combat table used for a round
of combat. For example, the 1-5 combat table is the one located in
the lower left-hand corner of the COMBAT RESOLUTION
CHART.
7.5.2.7.1 River Crossing Combat Tables: If any of the attacking
forces have crossed a river, a crossing arrow and/or disembarked
from at sea to enter the combat area then the river sections (found
only in the assault, escalated assault, echelon and probe columns
on the cordon line) of the OPERATIONAL POSSIBILITIES
CHART are used where appropriate for the first day's combat. If
combat continues into a second day, then the normal sections are
used.
7.5.2.7.2 Outflanking Tables To Use: Until the outflanking force
arrives, the first set (labelled 1st) of combat resolution tables on
the OPERATIONAL POSSIBILITIES CHART are used, with the
percentage losses caused by the outflanking side being based on
the pinning force army factors only. Once the outflanking force
has arrived the second set labelled 2nd) of combat resolution tables
are used with each army factor in the outflanking army factors of
the force counting as two army factors for the purpose of
determining percentage losses. For example, an outflanking
attacker has a pinning force of 20 factors with a 10 factor
outflanking force and faces a defender who chose the counterattack
operational possibilities chit. In the first combat round, the
attacker would have 20 factors on the 2-1 combat table and the
defender would use all defending factors on the 2-3 combat table.
Assume that the attacker loses 4 factors in the first combat round
and that the outflanking forces arrive (see 7 5.2.12) for the second
combat round. For the second combat round, the attacker would
have 16factors (left from the pinning force) plus two times 10
factors in the outflanking force equals 20 factors for a total
attacking force treated as 36factors on the 4-4 combat table and the
defender would use all surviving defending factors on the 3-1
combat table.
7.5.2.7.3 Combat Table Modifiers: These combat table may be
cumulatively modified by terrain effects in the area where numbers
a field combat occurs, although the casualty and morale level
numbers may never be modified above 5 nor below 1 regardless of
the modifiers that apply. These modifiers are:
7.5.2.7.3.1 Forest Modifiers: In forest areas the casualty
level is decreased by 1 for both sides (eg., combat table 2-2
becomes 1-2).
7.5.2.7.3.2 Mountain Modifiers: In mountain areas the
attacker's casualty level is reduced by 1.
16
7.5.2.7.3.3 Desert Modifiers: In desert areas the morale
level is increased by +1 for both sides (eg., combat table
2-2 becomes 2-3).
7.5.2.7.3.4 Marsh Modifiers: In marsh areas the casualty
level is decreased by 1 and the morale level is increased
by +1 for both sides (eg., combat table 2-2 becomes 1-3).
7.5.2.8 STEP EIGHT-GUARD AND ARTILLERY USE
(OPTIONAL): Guard commitment and artillery bombardments
(see options 12.3.4 and 12.3.5), now take place in the order
guard commitment followed by artillery bombardment, if
relevant.
7.5.2.9 STEP NINE-COMBAT RESOLUTION: The opposing
players each throw one die each and crossgrid their modified
rolls on their respective combat tables on the COMBAT
RESOLUTION CHART for each round, applying the result.
Combat is considered to be conducted simultaneously so both
forces take their losses at the same time.
7.5.2.9.1 Die Roll Modifiers: See 10.6.1 for determining
commanders and their tactical ratings. The die roll is modified
by commander differences. Use the COMMANDER CHART
on the Game Card and crossgrid the opposing commander's
tactical ratings to find the modifiers. For example, if the
attacking commander's tactical rating is 4 and the defending
commander's tactical rating is 3, the attacker's die roll is
modified by + 1. Any optional modifier (see 12.3.3. 1) is
cumulative with the commander modifiers, although the
maximum cumulative modifier can never exceed +1.
7.5.2.9.1.1: Commander tactical ratings are recalculated
after every round of combat (they can change if
reinforcing corps or a new reinforcing commander arrive).
7.5.2.9.1.2: If desired, a player may declare at the start of
a combat round that his commander's tactical rating is less
than it actually is for purposes of determining the die roll
modifiers on the COMMANDER CHART.
7.5.2.9.2 Percentage Loss-Types of Casualties: The percentage
loss (%LS) result is the percentage (see the CASUALTY
PERCENTAGE TABLE on the Game Card) of that side's
number of army factors which the other side must remove as
losses. Losses incurred may be taken in any fashion within the
following conditions:
7.5.2.9.2.1: Where possible, militia casualties may be
taken only until (not including) the round in which the
cumulative morale loss of the army equals or exceeds 2.0.
7.5.2.9.2.2: In the round in which a side breaks, one of its
losses must be cavalry (any type-regular, feudal, cossack
or freikorps), if possible.
7.5.2.9.2.3: Factors that become casualties in one combat
round may not be used in later rounds.
7.5.2.9.3 Morale Loss: The "morale loss" ("MRLS") is
subtracted from the other side's final morale level. These are
accumulated from round to round.
7.5.2.10 STEP TEN-VICTORY AND DEFEAT: When a force
is eliminated or its total morale loss reaches or exceeds its final
morale level it breaks, may be pursued and must retreat (unless
totally eliminated). The combat is over and no further combat
rounds are resolved. This may occur at the end of any round.
Skip this step and go to Step 11 if the field combat continues. If
the combat is over, perform this step, then skip to Step 14.
7.5.2.10.1 Winning a Field Combat: A major power wins a
field combat when the enemy side or an enemy pinning force
either breaks or is completely eliminated.
7.5.2.10.1.1 "Breaking": When a side's total morale loss
equals or exceeds its final morale level, it "breaks"
(retreats from the field) and combat ceases after that
round has been completed. In the round in which a side
breaks, at least one of that side's losses incurred must be
cavalry (this includes Cossacks and freikorps), if possible.
7.5.2.10.1.2 Pinning Force Defeat: If a pinning force
breaks or is eliminated before the outflanking force
"arrives", the whole side (including the outflanking force)
is considered to be broken and may be pursued.
7.5.2.10.1.2.1: If the pinning force is eliminated
before the outflanking force "arrives", all enemy leaders
present are captured by the victor and the outflanking
force is broken and may be pursued.
 7.5.2.10.1.2.2: If a pinning force is eliminated, any excess
casualties caused to that side go on the outflanking force.
7.5.2.10.1.3 Political Points For Winning/Losing Field
Combats: The victor now gains political points and the loser
loses them, recorded on the POLITICAL STATUS
DISPLAY on the Status Card). Half a political point is
gained or lost for each corps of the defeated side (rounding
fractions up) used during any round of that combat (this
includes corps in outflanking forces that never arrive, but
not reinforcing corps that do not arrive) up to a maximum of
+3 political points. For this purpose a single corps which
begins or reinforces a battle with more than 20 factors in it
is treated as 2 corps.
7.5.2.10.1.3.1: If the victor was commanded by the
NAPOLEON leader, they get one extra political point.
7.5.2.10.1.3.2: If the loser was commanded by the
NAPOLEON leader, they lose two extra political points.
7.5.2.10.2 Pursuit After Combat: When a side breaks, the victor
may launch a "pursuit" using the victor's cavalry factors. Pursuit
procedure is as follows:
7.5.2.10.2.1 Pursuit Class: The "pursuit class" is determined
from the PURSUIT CLASS TABLE on the Game Card by
crossgridding the victor's total morale loss in the combat
with the number of combat rounds completed. Combats
going into two or more days always use the 3+ rounds
column. The number found is the "pursuit class number",
which is then applied on the PURSUIT TABLE. For
example, if the victor had a 2.6 total morale loss when the
loser breaks at the end of the second combat round, the 2-
2.9 line is crossgridded with the 2 column to find a 3 pursuit
class. EXCEPTION: If a pursuit is ordered against forces
withdrawing after a day's combat rather than breaking,
automatically use a 1 pursuit class (prior to applying any
modifiers).
7.5.2.10.2.2 Pursuit Class Modifiers: The following
cumulative modifiers all apply when using the PURSUIT
TABLE:
7.5.2.10.2.2.1 Cavalry Leader Present: +1 is added to the die
roll if a cavalry leader (denoted by a cavalry leader symbol
on the leader counter) is present on the victor's side at the
combat even if he was not the commander, so long as at
least one cavalry factor of the leader's major power takes
part in the pursuit.
7.5.2.10.2.2.2 In Forest, Mountain or Desert: If the combat
took place in a forest, mountain or desert area, the pursuit
class column used on the PURSUIT TABLE is shifted one
column to the right of the column indicated by the pursuit
class number (a -1 modification). For example, if the pursuit
class number from the PURSUIT CLASS TABLE is 3 and
the combat area is forest, mountain or desert, the shift is
from the 3 to the 2 column.
7.5.2.10.2.2.3 In Marsh: If the combat took place in a marsh
area, the pursuit class column used on the PURSUIT
TABLE is shifted two columns to the right of the column
indicated by the pursuit class number (a 2 modification).
7.5.2.10.2.2.4 No Pursuit: Any result modified to less than a
class 1 pursuit means that no pursuit takes place.
7.5.2.10.2.3 Pursuit Losses: Roll the die and crossgrid the
modified die roll number with the modified pursuit class
column on the PURSUIT TABLE. The result is the
percentage loss of the total (this does include cavalry factors
that were in an outflanking force that did not arrive) cavalry
factors in the victor's force inflicted on the broken force.
Every loss in the broken force not taken in cavalry (which
includes cossacks and freikorps) is taken as three non-
militia or six militia factors (ie., 1 cavalry = 3 infantry 6 =
militia). If the entire losing force is eliminated by pursuit,
all losing leaders are captured by the victor.
7.5.2.10.3 Retreat After Losing A Combat: The loser is retreated
one area by the victor. This occurs after pursuit (if any).
7.5.2.10.3.1: All retreats must be into an adjacent land area
that is closest (any closest area, if several qualify equally) to
the nearest depot of any nationality in force, or if none is on
the map, towards that force's nearest controlled national
17
capital city. The depots discussed here are those of the
losing force. Gen 27/2
7.5.2.10.3.2: A retreating force may never be split up.
7.5.2.10.3.3: If the area retreated to contains an
unbesieged enemy corps, cossack, freikorps or depot
garrison, the force is retreated one more area (same rules
as 7.5.2.10.3. 1), etc., until an open area is reached.
7.5.2.10.3.4: Retreat across a crossing arrow or onto ships
is not permitted.
7.5.2.10.3.5: A force may not retreat into the same area
twice in the same retreat.
7.5.2.10.3.6: A force must surrender (An army factors and
leaders in the force become prisoners) if no retreat route is
available.
7.5.2.10.4 Unusual Field Combat Results: Sometimes field
combats may have unusual conclusions.
7.5.2.10.4.1 Break and Eliminated: If a side's forces break
in the same combat round in which the enemy forces are
completely eliminated (or a pinning force is eliminated
before the outflankers arrive) then the broken major
power wins the combat and does not retreat (an
outflanking force whose pinning force was eliminated
does retreat. Political points are gained by the winner
(survivor) and lost by the loser of this victory as per
7.5.2.10.1.3.
7.5.2.10.4.2 Both Break: If both forces break in the same
combat round and there are survivors on both sides then
neither side wins, gains or loses political points, or is
pursued. Only the attacker retreats-as per 7.5.2.10.3,
except that the attacker retreats his own forces.
7.5.2.11 STEP ELEVEN-REINFORCING ATTEMPTS:
After each round of a combat "day," players may attempt to
reinforce from adjacent land areas.
7.5.2.11.1 Reinforcing A Field Combat: After each round of
field combat-corps, cossacks, freikorps and guerrillas in adjacent
land areas may attempt to reinforce. Furthermore, unbesieged
corps, cossacks, freikorps or guerrillas (for an attacker) in a city
in the same or an adjacent area to the field combat may also
attempt to reinforce.
7.5.2.11.1.1: Reinforcement across a crossing arrow or by
disembarking is not permitted.
7.5.2.11.1.2: Forces may not attempt to reinforce if they
have already or will take part in another combat this same
major power sequence. Trivial combats do not count as a
combat to prevent attempts to reinforce. If all of a side's
forces in an as yet unresolved trivial combat leave to
reinforce another combat, the trivial combat does not take
place. Gen 25/4
7.5.2.11.1.3: Allied forces may take part in a combat
round only if at war with all the major powers on one
side, by reinforcing the other side (unless also at war with
a major power on that side) even if they would not
otherwise move in this major power's sequence of the
Land Movement Step.
7.5.2.11.2 Reinforcing Procedure: If the reinforcing forces
have a leader (determine a commander as in 10.6.1.1.1, if there
is more than one leader) with them (essential to reinforce with
cossacks, freikorps and/or guerrillas), the leader's strategic value
is used when dicing to reinforce with all the corps in that area as
a single unit, otherwise each corps dices separately to reinforce.
The commander's strategic rating or less needs to be rolled to
reinforce. If a leader is used for a reinforcing force, one or more
counters may be left behind, if desired. Gen 27/2
7.5.2.11.3 Strategic Rating Modifiers For Reinforcing: A
reinforcing commander's or corps' strategic rating is reduced by -
1 if it occupies a mountain, forest or marsh area, or wishes to
reinforce across a river. The reductions are not cumulative-the
maximum reduction never exceeds -1. A reduction may result in
corps being unable to reinforce at all.
7.5.2.11.4 Pinning Force Reinforcements: Any friendly forces
that reinforce a battle on a side with a pinning and an outflanking
force are attached to the pinning force, not to the outflanking
force.
7.5.2.11.5 Using Reinforcements: A side's final morale level is
not changed due to the arrival of reinforcements but its cavalry
factors (not doubled for this purpose) are counted for determining
cavalry superiority (see option 12.3.3.1) and all of its army factors
may be added to the side's army factors for determining percentage
losses on the enemy. A reinforcing leader may take command if
10.6.1.1.3 applies.
7.5.2.12 STEP TWELVE-ARRIVAL OF OUTFLANKING
FORCES: After the first and second combat rounds of the day,
players may attempt to roll for the arrival of outflanking forces.
7.5.2.12.1 Outflanking Force Arrival (?): At the end of the first
round of combat the outflanking player rolls a die and compares
the number rolled to the commander's strategic rating.
7.5.2.12.1.1: If the die roll is less than or equal to the
commander's strategic rating, as modified (all modifiers are
cumulative) by terrain and notes on the OPERATIONAL
POSSIBILITIES CHART, the outflank is successful and the
outflanking forces "arrives", otherwise, the outflankers must
dice again for possible arrival at the end of the 2nd round.
7.5.2.12.1.2: For outflanking, Commanders' strategic ratings
are reduced by -1 if the area containing the reinforcing
forces is a forest, mountain or marsh area.
7.5.2.12.1.3: The strategic rating of a commander is
increased by +2 at the end of the second combat round.
7.5.2.12.2 Withdraw vs. Outflanking: If the opposing side chose
the outflank chit and the outflanking force does not arrive after the
first round, all remaining corps of a withdraw chit side are
withdrawn successfully before the second round is fought. This is
handled as a normal withdrawal, as in 7.5.2.5.2.3. There is no
pursuit.
 If this is not the third round of the day, repeat Steps 7-
12, using the combat tables appropriate for each combat
round.
7.5.2.13 STEP THIRTEEN - "END OF DAY"
WITHDRAWAL / ADDITIONAL COMBAT: At the
conclusion of three combat rounds (ie., one combat "day"), if
neither side has been eliminated or broken, the players have the
choice to continue a battle or to end it. The opposing commanders
should secretly note their intention to "fight" or "withdraw", then
reveal their choices simultaneously.
7.5.2.13.1 Withdrawing After A "Day" of Combat: Either or
both sides may automatically withdraw if that was their choice.
These withdrawals are handled as per losing a combat (see
7.5.2.10.3.1), but are conducted by the controlling players for their
sides. If both sides choose to withdraw, both must leave the area
and there are no pursuits. Since no one was defeated, no political
points are gained or lost from the combat. Gen 25/4 & 27/2
7.5.2.13.2 New "Days" of Combat: If both players chose to fight,
the combat goes into a further day (three rounds more). New
Operational Possibilities chits are chosen, etc., repeating Steps 1-
12.
7.5.2.13.2.1: The final morale levels used are those of the
first day less -0.5 for each succeeding day plus any
OPERATIONAL POSSIBILITIES CHART modifiers.
Final morale levels are otherwise not re-calculated even if
reinforcements arrived.
7.5.2.13.2.2: Any outflanking forces that have not yet
arrived rejoin the pinning force "overnight," so that all
forces are once again united at the start of each day.
Possible reinforcing forces do not arrive overnight.
7.5.2.14 STEP FOURTEEN-DEPOTS AFTER FIELD
BATTLES: If there are any enemy supply depots in the area with
only friendly forces remaining, then that supply depot may be
destroyed or converted to a friendly supply depot if it would then
be part of a valid supply chain (see 7.3.6.2).
7.5.2.15 EXAMPLE OF FIELD COMBAT: Turkey is at war
with Russia. In its Land Movement Step it moves with 7 corps
containing 18 feudal infantry, 18 feudal cavalry and 14 Janissary
(regular infantry) factors into an area containing 4 Russian corps
with 6 Guard infantry, 17 regular infantry, 13 militia and 1 regular
cavalry factors. These forces are not revealed until after cross-
referencing on the OPERATIONAL POSSIBILITIES CHART
occurs.
STEP ONE (see 7.5.2.1): The Turkish player chooses from the
attacker's set of operational possibilities chits and the Russian
player from the defender's set.
18
STEP TWO (see 7.5.2.2): Next, each player declares whether or
not they have chosen "outflank". Neither has, so Step Three (see
7.5.2.3) is skipped.
STEP FOUR (see 7.5.2.4): Turkey now reveals he has chosen
the "assault" chit and Russia shows the "cordon" chit. Since the
Russians did not choose the withdraw chit, Step Five (see
7.5.2.5) is skipped.
STEP SIX (see 7.5.2.6): Morale (using Method One) for Turkey
is: 36 (feudal infantry and cavalry factors) times 2.0 morale
value plus 14 (Janissary infantry factors) times 3.0 morale value
equals 114 divided by 50 army factors equals 2.28, which round
up to 2.3 base and final morale level. Morale for Russia is: 6
(guard infantry factors) times 5.0 morale value plus 17 (regular
infantry factors) times 3.0 morale value plus 13 (militia factors)
times 2.0 morale value plus 1 (regular cavalry factor) times 4.0
morale value equals 111 divided by 37 army factors equals 3.0
base and final morale level. Both sides reveal their sizes (number
of army factors) and compositions (types of army factors).
STEP SEVEN-FIRST ROUND (see 7.5.2.7): Cross-
referencing on the OPERATIONAL POSSIBILITIES CHART
indicates that for the first round Turkey is on the 4-1 table and
Russia on the 2-1 table. No terrain modifiers apply. Step Eight
(see 7.5.2.8) is skipped, as those options are not being used.
STEP NINE-FIRST ROUND (see 7.5.2.9): Both players have
a leader with a modified tactical rating of 2 which results in no
leader die roll modifiers from the COMMANDER CHART. If
option 12.3.3.1 were used (it is not), Turkey would have a + 1die
roll modifier for (8 feudal cavalry versus 1 regular cavalry
factor) cavalry superiority. Turkey, on the 4-1 table, rolls a 4,
which causes a 10 percentage loss (10% of 50 Turkish army
factors = 5 Russian army factors lost) and a -1.0 morale loss. The
Russians can take all of their army factor losses in militia factors
as their total morale loss is less than 2.0. Russia, on the 2-1 table,
rolls a 3, which causes a 5 percentage loss (5 % of 3 7 Russian
army factors = 2 Turkish army factors lost) and a -.02 morale
loss. The Turks take both of their army factor losses as feudal
infantry factors. As neither side breaks nor is eliminated and
there are no reinforcements or flanking forces involved, Steps
Ten through Twelve are skipped (see 7.5.2.10-75.2.12) and play
moves to the second combat round.
STEP SEVEN-SECOND ROUND: On the second round
Turkey is on the 4-3 table and Russia is on the 2-1 table.
STEP NINE-SECOND ROUND: Again, no die roll modifiers.
Turkey, on the 4-3 table, rolls another 4, which causes a 15
percentage loss (15% of 48 surviving Turkish army factors = 7
Russian army factors lost) and a -2.0 morale loss. Russia, on the
2-1 table, rolls a 4, which causes a 5 percentage loss (5% of 32
Russian army factors = 2 Turkish army factors lost) and a -.05
morale loss. The Turks again eliminate two feudal infantry
factors. Russia has broken as total morale loss is -3.0, -1.0 in
round one plus -2.0 in round two, exactly equalling the Russian
final morale value), therefore one of the losses inflicted in the
last round must be cavalry (the Russian loses his only regular
cavalry factor) and none can be militia (if possible) as morale
loss has exceeded a total of -2.0 this round (6 Russian regular
infantry factors are removed). Russia now has 6 guard, 11
regular infantry and 8 militia factors remaining.
STEP TEN (see 7.5.2. 10): Having broken the Russians and
having cavalry, Turkey now pursues the Russians. As it was the
second round in which the Russians broke and Turkey has lost a
total of - 0.7 morale, checking the PURSUIT CLASS TABLE
shows a 5 pursuit class. On the PURSUIT TABLE, Turkey rolls
a 5 which means 60 % of 18 Turkish Feudal cavalry factors = 11
pursuit loses to the Russians. This is equivalent to 33 regular
infantry and/or guard factors which is a lot more than the
Russian has, therefore his force is wiped out and the leader(s)
captured. Turkey gains 2 political points and Russia loses 2, as
there were 4 corps on the losing side.
7.5.3 TRIVIAL COMBATS: Combats in which one side
initially consists solely of garrison factors on a depot, cossacks,
freikorps and/or guerrillas not in cities must be resolved using
trivial combat. Players may also resolve any other field or
limited field combats in this manner, if both commanders agree.
7.5.3.1: Trivial combats are resolved similarly to field combats,
but the procedure is much simplified. No operational
possibilities chits are chosen, but commander (see 7.5.2.9.1) and
cavalry superiority (see option 12.3.3.1) modifiers are included as
for field combats. Trivial combats may not be reinforced (see
7.5.2.1.1) unless trivial combat procedure is being used to resolve
a field or limited field combat.
7.5.3.2: Combat is fought using the 5-2 combat table for both sides
for all three combat rounds, subject to modification for terrain (see
7.5.2.7) and guard commitment (see option 12.3.4). Additional
"days" of combat may be fought using trivial combat.
7.5.3.3: Any type of factor may be removed as a casualty, at the
controlling player's option, during any round of a trivial combat
(ignore the restrictions of 7.5.2.9.2.1).
7.5.3.4: The normal field combat methods of determining final
morale values, breaks, retreats, withdrawals at the end of a "day"
and pursuit rules are followed. Depot and city garrisons cannot
retreat and losing survivors that break must surrender if not
eliminated by a pursuit. Gen 27/2
7.5.3.5: No political points are gained or lost in trivial combats.
EXCEPTION: If both commanders had agreed to resolve what
could have been a field or limited field combat by using trivial
combat procedures, the normal political point changes are made
(see 7.5.2.10.1.3).
7.5.4 SIEGES: These represent the surrounding and reduction of
garrisoned enemy cities. A major power's corps may besiege any
occupied city in territory controlled by a major power or minor
neutral with which it is at war or any city occupied by enemy
troops wherever it is located. Guerrillas, freikorps and cossacks
may only conduct sieges in conjunction with friendly corps. Depot
garrisons may never take part in sieges. The forces besieging a city
are the "besiegers”, and the garrison inside the city are the
"defenders". A phasing force that just attacked and won a field or
trivial combat in an area may then besiege an enemy city in that
same area if all corps in the, phasing force used depot (regular, sea
and/or invasion) supply, and/or did not use unused movement
points to modify a foraging roll (see 7.4.1.2.2).
7.5.4.1 BESIEGER ASSAULT ATTEMPTS: A besieging major
power may elect to launch "assault" attempts. For assault attempts
a die is rolled and the result referenced to the SIEGE TABLE on
the Game Card.
7.5.4.1.1 Assault Attempt Modifiers: The die roll for assault
attempts is cumulatively modified as follows:
7.5.4.1.1.1 City Siege Value: The city siege value (the
number of fleches in the city picture on the mapboard) is
subtracted from the die roll.
7.5.4.1.1.2 Undergarrisoned: +1 is added if the city is not
garrisoned to within 5 factors of the city's garrison capacity.
For example, if the garrison capacity is 15, one will be
added if there are 9 or less factors in the city.
7.5.4.1.2 Assault Attempt Results: The results from the SIEGE
TABLE are resolved as follows.
7.5.4.1.2.1 Sortie?: If “sortie?" is the result the defender
may elect to "sortie" (historically, in a sortie a besieged
force would launch a limited surprise attack on the
besiegers) out against the besieging force. In a sortie, the
defending player rolls a die. On a roll of 5 or 6 the defender
loses one army factor (defending player's choice), and any
other result is a one army factor loss (besieging player's
choice) to the besieger. If the defender chooses not to roll a
die, nothing happens.
7.5.4.1.2.2 NR: No results. Nothing happens.
7.5.4.1.2.3 Breach: If "breach" (indicating that a gap has
been blown through the defender's walls) is the result on the
SIEGE TABLE, the following may be done:
7.5.4.1.2.3.1 Honors of War: The defender may ask for the
"honors of war" (EXCEPTION: Turkish and Spanish
defenders and their minor allies may not). If honors of war
are granted by the besieger, the garrison corps and/or
garrison army factors are moved to the nearest friendly-
controlled unbesieged city and/or city area. If there is no
such city, the garrison surrenders or fights instead. Note that
minor Free State garrisons may not leave their own country,
and if forced to, would have to surrender or fight. There are
no political points for the honors of war.
7.5.4.1.2.3.2 Surrender: If honors of war are not granted, or
not requested, the garrison may surrender (all become
19
prisoners) or may fight an assault combat, at the
defending player's option. If the defender fights and is
broken, the surviving defending army factors must
surrender. There are no political points for a surrender.
7.5.4.1.2.3.3 Assault: If there are no honors of war or
surrender, the besieger must fight and assault the city.
7.5.4.1.3 Assault Combat Resolution: These simulate attempts
to "storm" a city by an assault through a breach. Assault Combat
is resolved similarly to trivial combat, but is even more
simplified.
7.5.4.1.3. 1: The besieging forces fight on the 5-1 combat
table and the defenders on the 5-2 combat table of the
COMBAT RESOLUTION CHART on the Game Card for
a maximum of three rounds (assault combats never last
more than one "day") with no modifications for terrain,
leaders and/or cavalry superiority. All available factors
on both side must participate. There are no pursuits and
assault combats may not be reinforced.
7.5.4.1.3.2: Final morale levels are determined as per
7.5.2.6.
7.5.4.1.3.3: Any type of army factor may be removed as a
casualty, at the controlling player's option, during any
round of an assault combat.
7.5.4.1.3.4: If the besieger loses or does not win (break or
eliminate the defenders) within three rounds, the siege is
resumed, with no further combat this player sequence.
7.5.4.1.3.5: If the besieger wins (the defender is
eliminated or broken), then the city is captured and all
surviving army factors and leaders are surrendered.
7.5.4.1.4 Political Points For Siege Assault Combat Winners:
If the assaulted city contains a corps and/or is a "fortress" (has
one or more fleches), the defender gets one political point if the
besieger loses (is eliminated or broken) or does not win within
three rounds, and the besieger gets one political point if the city
is captured. Record on the POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY on
the Status Card. No political points are ever lost on either side,
regardless of the outcome and none are gained if the city has a
no corps and/or is not a fortress (has no fleches).
7.5.4.2 DEFENDER ATTACKS BESIEGER: Defenders may
attack besiegers during the defending player's sequence of a
Land Combat Step, if desired.
7.5.4.2.1 Garrison Attack Combats: These simulate a city
garrison attacking the besiegers and are resolved similarly to
siege assault combats.
7.5.4.2.1.1: If the defending garrison or a portion thereof
(all defending factors do not have to be used) chooses to
attack, the defending major power uses the 5-1 combat
table and the besieger (who must use all available factors)
uses the 5-2 combat table on the COMBAT
RESOLUTION CHART for a maximum of three rounds
(garrison attack combats never last more than one "day")
with no modifications for terrain, leaders, or cavalry
superiority. There are no pursuits and these combats
cannot be reinforced.
7.5.4.2.1.2: Final morale levels are determined as per
7.5.2.6.
7.5.4.2.1.3: Any type of army factor may be removed as a
casualty, at the controlling player's option, during any
round of a garrison attack combat.
7.5.4.2.1.4: If the defending force loses or does not win
(break or eliminate the besiegers) within three rounds, the
siege is resumed, unless the combat eliminates every army
factor in a garrison, in which case the city is captured.
7.5.4.2.1.5: If the defender wins, the besieger retreats in
accordance with the retreat after combat rules (see
7.5.2.10.3), but may not be pursued, and any previously
besieged corps may, if desired, be immediately moved out
of the city into the surrounding area.
7.5.4.2.2 Political Points For Garrison Attack Combats:
There are no political points gained or lost for garrison attack
combats.
7.5.4.2.3 Relieving Force-Limited Field Combats: If the
besieged force attacks with the help of "relieving forces"
(ie., external corps that enter the area from another area)
or such relieving forces attack without assistance from
 any part (all besieged factors do not have to be used) of the
besieged force, a "limited" field combat instead of a
defender attack combat is fought. Limited field combats are
fought at the same time as field and trivial combats (ie.,
before any siege assault or defender attack combats). A
limited field combat is a normal field combat (use all
normal field combat rules) that may not exceed one "day"
(three combat rounds) in length and uses the following
special rules:
7.5.4.2.3.1 Relieving Force Fails TO Win: If the relieving
force breaks or does not win within 3 rounds, the siege is
resumed.
7.5.4.2.3.1.1: The surviving siege defenders return to the
besieged city and the entire relieving force returns to the
area from which it entered the siege area (returns to any one
of the areas from which it entered, if more than one). If all
siege defenders were eliminated, the city is captured.
7.5.4.2.3.1.2: There is no pursuit if the relieving force did
not break, and, if it did break, only the relieving force may
be pursued, not the siege defenders.
7.5.4.2.3.2 Relieving Force Wins: If the besiegers break,
they retreat in accordance with the normal retreat after
combat rules (see 7.5.2.10.3), but may only be pursued by
cavalry that is in the relieving force (not in the siege
8.0 * THE ECONOMIC PHASE
During this phase, which occurs only at the end of the March,
June, September and December Turns, money and manpower are
collected and certain expenditures are made. Players should keep
track of their current amounts of money on a separate sheet of
paper or use the REINFORCEMENTS RECORD and
ECONOMIC AND MANPOWER WORKSHEET forms on copies
of side two of the National Cards. Prussia should do similarly for
current saved manpower levels. The actions of the Economic
Phase occur in the following order:
[ 8.1 ]THE VICTORY POINTS STEP: In this step, the
POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY on the Status Card is consulted
and each major power receives the victory Points specified for the
position at which it is located. For example, if the Austrian
political status marker was on the square at the extreme right of the
neutral zone line, Austria would receive 8 victory points.
8.1.1 RECORDING VICTORY POINTS: The victory points
gained are recorded by adjusting each major power's victory point
markers on the VICTORY POINTS DISPLAY on the Status are to
show the new total of victory points.
8.1.2 POSSIBLE BRITISH CHANGE IN VICTORY POINTS:
The British player has the option of spending up to one third of the
victory points he gained this step to subtract that same number of
victory points from the total victory points of any ONE major
power with which Great Britain is currently at war. This is done
instead of Great Britain gaining those victory points.
8.1.3 HOW TO WIN A GAME: During the Victory Points Step
of a game's final Turn, or possibly sooner, a victor is determined.
8.1.3.1 SCENARIO VICTORY: Each scenario has its own
victory conditions (see the individual scenarios in 13.0) and the
victory determination systems are different from those used for
campaign games.
8.1.3.2 CAMPAIGN VICTORY: Victory points are collected
during each Victory Points Step (see 8.1). In the campaign games,
the first player(s) to obtain enough total victory points to reach or
exceed his major power's victory level and announce this fact (it
does not have to be announced at the first opportunity) is a winner.
If two or more major powers have reached or exceeded their
victory levels simultaneously, those major powers are co-winners.
Players may not transfer victory points to each other. If no player
reaches the required victory level by the end of a campaign game,
Great Britain wins.
8.1.3.2.1 The Major Power Victory Levels: The required victory
levels for each major power are given in the VICTORY LEVELS
CHART on the Game Card.
20
defender's force) and any previously besieged corps may,
if desired, then be immediately moved out of the city into
the surrounding area.
7.5.4.2.3.3 Political Points For Limited Field Combats:
Political points for winning and losing are assigned as for
field combats (see 7.5.2.10.1.3). To win or lose, one side
must be broken or eliminated; otherwise the combat is
considered a draw.
7.5.5 REMOVAL OF CORPS: At the end of a day's combat,
when all casualties are removed, excess corps counters emptied
by losses may also be removed from the mapboard. This may
cause a change in a commander's tactical rating for the next day's
combat (see 10. 6.1.2. 1)
[ 7.6 ] THE GUERRILLA STEP: Guerrilla creation and anti -
guerrilla operations occur in this step-see 10.1.1.
[ 7.7 ] THE CONQUEST STEP: This step is performed after
all major power sequences are completed. It can be performed
any convenient order. Control flags are changed to show the
conquest of minor countries and their change of control. The
control flags are changed only if the capital of the minor country
was occupied during the previous Turn and the conqueror has
maintained uninterrupted and unbesieged occupation for the
entire current Turn. A newly conquered minor country is always
marked with a conquered control flag.
8.1.3.2.2 Shorter Campaigns: If players wish to finish a
campaign game earlier, they can determine the victor by
calculating the major power which has attained the largest
percentage of its victory level. Average these percentages for
players controlling two major powers (see 14.2.2).
8.1.3.2.3 The Final Victory Points Step: During a Victory
Points Step when the announced total victory points of a major
power has matched or exceeded that major power's victory level
or, if the final month that will be played has been concluded,
during the final Victory Points Step of the game, manpower
levels are counted for additional victory points.
8.1.3.2.3.1: Each major power counts its total currently
controlled manpower values in controlled home nation
provinces, controlled ceded provinces of other home
nations and conquered minor countries (none of the
component territories of the new political combinations
used in options 11.1-11.6 count as conquered). Controlled
minor Free States and/or controlled provinces or minor
countries with capitals currently occupied by an enemy
are not counted.
8.1.3.2.3.2: These manpower values are added as extra
victory points to the major power's victory point totals for
determining a winner or winners.
8.1.3.2.3.3: For players controlling two major powers (see
14.2.2) to win, both of their major powers must match or
exceed their victory level or the excess victory points of
one of these major powers must be enough that, by adding
these excess (not needed to match its own victory level)
victory points to the other major power's victory points,
that addition will be enough to bring that second major
power to its victory level.
[ 8.2 ] THE MONEY AND MANPOWER COLLECTION
STEP: The "tax" (for money) and "manpower" (recruiting for
ships and army factors) values for each province are printed
within the province on the mapboard. The domestic trading
values for each port city are printed in its blockade box. NOTE:
Copies of the ECONOMIC AND MANPOWER WORKSHEET
forms on side 2 of the National Cards are useful for the
calculations involved in 8.2-8.5.
8.2.1 MONEY COLLECTION: There are a number of sources
from which a major power may collect money. Each player
totals the money due to him from Economic Manipulation (see
option 12.5-this may be negative), from taxation, from trade and
Spanish Gold. This total is added to any accumulated amount
carried over from previous quarters.
8.2.1.1 MONEY COILLECTION BY TAXATION: The tax
money due a major power is determined by adding together all of
the tax values of all of its controlled home provinces, currently
ceded enemy provinces and conquered minor countries. The tax
money due a controlled minor Free State is similarly and
separately figured (see 8.2.3). A major power may not collect taxes
from a province or minor country if its capital city is occupied by
unbesieged enemy factors. A major power collects no taxes at all
(except for its minor Free States) if its national capital city (or, in
the case of Russia, if either Moscow or St. Petersburg) is occupied
by unbesieged enemy factors.
8.2.1.2 MONEY COLLECTION BY TRADE: The trade money
due a major power is determined by adding together all of the
domestic trading values of its ports. The domestic trade money due
a controlled minor Free State is similarly and separately figured.
Great Britain may trade with any eligible ports, but only if the
major power controlling the port also wishes to trade. For ALL
trade, Great Britain announces all trading he wishes to conduct,
after which each major power involved may agree or disagree.
Gen 25/4 & 27/2
8.2.1.2.1 Domestic (Normal) Trade: All domestic trade is
considered to be done with Great Britain. When an eligible port
does trade, Great Britain receives the first trading value amount
listed for its trade and the controlling major power gains the
second trading value amount.
8.2.1.2.1.1: A port is not eligible for trading (domestic or
overseas) if it is blockaded, besieged, or occupied by an
enemy major power other than the major power controlling
the province or minor country in which the port lies.
8.2.1.2.1.2: Ports north of the ice line are not eligible for
trade in the last (December) Economic Phase of a year.
8.2.1.2.1.3: Ports on the Black Sea can only trade if given
permission by the major power controlling Constantinopole.
8.2.1.2.1.4: A major power may not trade using any port in
a province or minor country if that province or minor
country's capital city is occupied by unbesieged enemy
factors.
8.2.1.2.1.5: A major power may not conduct any trade
(except through eligible controlled minor Free State ports) if
its national capital city (both Moscow and St. Petersburg for
Russia) is occupied by unbesieged enemy factors. A major
power at war with Great Britain may not conduct any
domestic trade.
8.2.1.2.1.6: Great Britain may trade with ports in minor
neutral countries, with no major power earning the second
amount.
8.2.1.2.1.7: Great Britain may trade with eligible ports in
provinces and minor conquered countries it controls,
gaining both values. Great Britain may also trade with
eligible ports in minor Free States it controls, gaining the
first amount, the minor Free State gaining the second.
8.2.1.2.2 Overseas Trade: This represents trade with nations and
colonies not shown on the map.
8.2.1.2.2.1 British Colonial Trade: Great Britain receives
an additional 30 (only 15 money points while at war with
the U.S.A.-see 8.2.1.2.2.2.2.3) money points for trade with
its colonies.
8.2.1.2.2.2 American Trade: American trade represents
European trade with the American continents.
8.2.1.2.2.2.1 American Trade Value: Each major
power other than Great Britain may trade with
America, receiving twice the second domestic trading
value of any one port eligible (must use the one with
the highest possible domestic trading values) for
domestic trade which it controls. This port may not be
in a controlled minor Free State but may be in a
controlled conquered minor country. It does not matter
if this port is also used for domestic trade with Great
Britain. Minor Free States have no separate American
trade.
21
8.2.1.2.2.2.2 Stopping American Trade-War With
The United States: If Great Britain is at war with
another major power(s), it may elect during this step
to automatically stop that major power(s) from
trading with America.
8.2.1.2.2.2.2.1: If Great Britain stops the
American trade, Great Britain gains the value of
the American trade it stops.
8.2.1.2.2.2.2.2: If this is done, the British player
also rolls one die. If the roll is equal to or less
than the number of major powers denied trade
with America by Great Britain, Great Britain's
actions are considered to have started a war with
the U. S. A. Great Britain immediately loses 15
money points and loses 15 money points of its
colonial trade every following Economic Phase
while it remains at war with the USA. While
Great Britain is at war with the USA no major
power may trade with America. The war with the
USA lasts until Great Britain ends it by choosing
to lose 5 political points during any Peace Step.
There may be more than one war with the USA
during the course of a campaign game.
8.2.1.3 SPANISH GOLD: Spain receives money from a yearly
gold convoy from Spanish overseas colonies-two dice are rolled
on the SPANISH GOLD CONVOY TABI-E on the Game Card
during the September Economic Phase only and the amount
indicated is received in money points. If Great Britain is at war
with Spain at this time, modify the dice roll by -2. A modified
dice roll of less than 2 results in there being no gold for Spain
this year-instead, Great Britain has captured the gold convoy and
gets 15 money points for the capture. If all Spanish-controlled
ports are blockaded and/or if no ports are Spanish-controlled or
unoccupied by enemy forces then there is also no gold convoy,
although there is also no dice roll in this case.
8.2.1.2.4 Continental Blockade: If using the option that Great
Britain may choose which specific ports he will trade with,
rather than just trading with (all ports of) the Major Power,
implement this rule. At the conclusion of the Money and
Manpower Collection Step, Britain loses one political point (PP)
if its total Domestic Trade is less than $25, and loses a second
PP if its total trade is less than $15. MLB
8.2.2 MANPOWER COLLECTION: Each player totals the
manpower due to him from Economic Manipulation (this may be
negative), from friendly controlled home provinces and
conquered minor countries only. Manpower is not collected from
ceded enemy provinces nor from a controlled province or minor
country whose capital city contains unbesieged enemy factors.
The presence of an unbesieged enemy in the national capital of a
major power does not affect the collection of manpower except
for the capital's province.
8.2.3 MINOR FREE STATES MONEY AND MANPOWER
COLLECTION: Minor Free States gain doubles the money and
manpower values printed on the map. To this is added the money
value of any domestic trade with Great Britain. Minor Free State
do not trade with America. This money and manpower is used
exclusively for purchases and maintenance of that minor's
forces. Any wastage is lost. The controlling major power may
loan money (actually, give the money-minor Free States never
repay loans, and may not make loans of their own) to a minor
Free State. If the capital city of a minor Free State is occupied by
unbesieged enemy factors, it gains no money (including trade) or
manpower.
[ 8.3 ]THE LENDING MONEY STEP: Major powers may
now lend or give ("subsidies?") money to each other or to their
own controlled minor Free States. Minor Free States may not
loan money. Money may not be lent or given at any other time in
the game. Money that changes hands is added or subtracted from
the money obtained from other sources. Manpower may not be
loaned or given away at any time. Between major powers,
money may, only be loaned or given to allies.
[ 8.4 ] THE MANIPUILATION SFEP:
8.4.1 OCCUPIED HOME NATION CAPITALS: If a major
power home nation capital is enemy occupied and unbesieged
during a Manipulation Step, the major power without a capital may
not collect money (see 8.2.1.1) or carry out any previously set
economic manipulation (see option 12.5) or set any new economic
manipulation (0 must be set). Instead, the major power's political
status marker must be adjusted on the POLITICAL STATUS
DISPILAY on the Status Card to show the following drop in
points:
8.4.1.1 LONDON OR PARIS OCCUPIED: -3 political points.
8.4.1.2 BERLIN, CONSTANTINOPLE OR VIENNA
OCCUPIED: -2 political points.
8.4.1.3 MADRID, MOSCOW OR ST PETERSBURG
OCCUPIED: -1 political point. For Russia, this is -1 political
point per capital (Moscow and/or St. Petersburg) occupied.
8.4.2 ECONOMIC MANIPULATION (OPTIONAL): If
8.4.1does not apply, see option 12.5 for information on using
economic manipulation during this step.
8.4.3 RETURNING REMOVED LEADERS: At the end of a
Manipulation Step, determine if a removed leader (removed as a
result of peace condition C.6) can be returned to play (or drop
political points at this time to ensure the return during the next
Reinforcement Phase-see 10.6.4).
[ 8.5 ] MONEY AND MANPOWER EXPENDITURE STEP:
Money and manpower are used to pay expenses and for
building/recruiting new ships and/or army (regular infantry and
cavalry, militia, guard and/or artillery) factors. Minor Free States
pay their own maintenance, at the same rates. If the minor Free
State cannot pay, the major power controlling the minor Free State
must pay. Money should be expended in the order that expenses
are listed below. Any major power that becomes "bankrupt" during
8.5.1 or 8.5.2 loses -3 political points (immediately adjust the
major power's political status marker on the POLITICAL STATUS
DISPLAY)
8.5.1 MAINTENANCE: These represent the expense of counters
already on the map. If there is insufficient money for the
maintenance of all counters in 8.5.1, the major power pays all
available money and becomes bankrupt. This has no effect on the
counters on the map.
8.5.1.1 CORPS MAINTENANCE: For each corps of any type
and at any location a major power has on the map (not including
minor Free State corps, which are paid for separately) it expends
one money point in maintenance.
8.5.1.2 FLEET MAINTENANCE: It costs various amounts to
maintain fleets; one money point for each fleet located in a port, 2
money points for each fleet in a blockade box JJ and 5 money
points for each fleet located in a sea area.
8.5.1.3 DEPOT MAINTENANCE: For each of its depots on the
map a major power expends one money point in maintenance.
8.5.2 FORMAL DEBTS: Major Powers now pay off any "formal"
debts that is, those required through peace terms (see peace terms
B. 3, C. 3 and C. 7). If there is insufficient money for this the
major power pays what there is and becomes bankrupt (if not
already so) and the remainder of the debt still exists as a formal
debt. Players may now also choose, but are not obliged, to pay any
informal debts.
8.5.3 EXPENDITURE ON FORCES: Major Powers with money
left may spend it on army factor or ship purchases (see the
PURCHASE / COST CHART on the Game Card). For example,
an infantry factor could be purchased by using three money and
two manpower points.
8.5.3.1: Minor Free States make separate purchases using their
own money and manpower.
8.5.3.2: Any excess manpower is lost (except for Prussia, which
may save manpower, though its controlled minor Free States may
not).
8.5.3.3: The purchase of army factors and ships and their date of
arrival on the map as reinforcements should be recorded on a
separate piece of paper or on copies of the REINFORCEMENT
RECORD of sides two of the National Cards.
8.5.3.4: Neither the Turkish Major Power nor minor Free States
may build militia infantry. Insurrection, feudal troops, guerrillas,
cossacks or freikorps are not build in this step (see 10.1.1.1,
10.1.2.1, 10.1.3.1 and 10.1.4.2). Turkey may not build any guard
factors and only France and Russia may build artillery factors.
22
8.5.3.5: All ships and factors purchased during this step are
placed on the map as reinforcements during the Reinforcement
Phase(s) after the required number of months have passed (based
on the "Time" column on the PURCHASE/COST CHART on
the Game Card) following the purchase of the factors. For
example, an infantry factor (which requires three months to
build) purchased during the March, 1806 Money and Manpower
Expenditure Step is placed on the map during the June, 1806
Reinforcement Phase.
8.5.4 EXPENDITURE ON NEW CORPS AND FLEET
COUNTERS: Major Powers and their controlled minor Free
States may purchase fleet and corps counters not currently on the
map by paying one money point per counter. Only
AVAILABLE (currently off the map) fleet and corps counters
may be purchased as "new" counters. Counters currently on the
mapboard may NOT be purchased to be available for immediate
return to play as "new" counters should they be eliminated. Gen
25/4 These counters must be placed on the board within the next
three months (the next quarter) or they must be again purchased
on another Economic Phase before they can be placed on the
map. Turkish feudal, Austrian insurrection and the Austrian
Tyrol corps that are not on the map at this time do not have to be
purchased.
8.5.5 SURPLUS MINOR FREE STATE MONEY OR
MANPOWER: Any remaining unused money or manpower
points belonging to minor Free States are lost. Minor country
Free States and Kingdoms may save up to $14 between
economic phases. If at any time in the future a new rule
introduces a factor that costs more than $15, then the savings
limit is increased to one less than that cost. JJ
8.5.6 MILITIA CONVERSION (OPTIONAL): If option
12.1.1 is used, militia to be converted is removed from the map
and paid for during this step.
8.5.7 SURPLUS MAJOR POWER MONEY OR
MANPOWER: Any remaining money points belonging to a
major power are available for use to meet any of that major
power's expenses (ie., building depots, using depot supply, etc.-
this also includes these expenses for controlled Free States
and/or supplying allied corps) during future months. Prussian
manpower points can also be saved-those of other major powers
are lost if not used.
[ 8.6] THE POLITICAL STATUS ADJUSTMENT STEP: In
this step, each player checks the box on the POLITICAL
STATUS DISPLAY on the Status Card containing his political
status marker and gains or loses the political points specified by
the value of the large political status adjustment ("PSA") number
in the box. Where this is a positive number, this is a political
points gain (move the marker to the right); where the number is
negative, this is a political points loss (move the marker to the
left). The political status marker is moved by the indicated
number of boxes in the indicated direction. Players may not
transfer political points to one another.
[ 8.7 ] THE CIVIL DISORDER STEP: If, during any
Economic Phase, a major power can collect no home nation
manpower, that major power goes into "civil disorder" and that
major power is permanently out of the game and all of its home
nation forces are permanently eliminated from the map.
8.7.1: All conquered minor countries of the major power
undergoing civil disorder pass to the control of the major power
occupying the major power's capital.
8.7.2: Controlled minor Free States of the major power
undergoing civil disorder become neutral if no enemy forces
control their capital. If a capital is controlled, their control passes
to the major power occupying their capital.
8.7.3: Each of that major power's home nation provinces are
ceded to the major power controlling the provincial capital.
EXCEPTION: Where no major power controls the provincial
capital, that province passes to the major power controlling the
national capital. These provinces are now all considered to be
ceded provinces.
8.7.4: If the forces of two or more major powers are placed to
dispute claims to territory arising from civil disorder (ie., mixed
forces occupy a capital city), the involved major powers may
decide on control in any mutually agreeable manner, or, if
unable to agree, may use competitive die rolls to determine the
new controlling major power (the modifiers from 4.6.2 apply to
these die rolls for disputed minor countries).
8.7.5: Each major power at war with the major power undergoing
civil disorder gains 5 political points, the same as if the major
power in civil disorder had surrendered unconditionally. I’m sorry,
but this rule is horrible. We will use 11.9.1.2.
[ 8.8 ] THE CEDING STEP: Each player secretly writes down
what controlled minor country or ceded province he wishes to
"cede" (change control) to another major power. When such
territories are ceded as a result of a peace settlement rather than of
an player agreement, the territory is instead ceded at the moment
peace is declared.
8.8.1: Unceded home nation provinces may not be ceded at this
time. They may only be ceded as part of a formal (conditional or
unconditional surrender) peace settlement.
8.8.2: Territory ceded during this step may only be ceded to allies.
If desired, a major power may cede one individual district of a
multidistrict minor country instead of ceding the entire minor
country (this still costs a political point). During any one Ceding
Step no individual major power may cede more than one minor
country, minor country district or ceded province
8.8.3: A territory may not be ceded while it contains any forces of
a major power at war with the controlling major power or, in the
case of a minor country, separately at-war with that minor country,
unless it is ceded to that major power with forces inside that
territory.
9.0 THE TIME RECORD PHASE
During this phase, the Turn markers are advanced to show the start
of a new month. The "month" marker is advanced every month and
the "year" marker is advanced whenever the "month" marker is
moved into the "JAN" box.
[ 9.1 ] WINTER: The months of January, February and December
are "winter" months and the ice lines printed on the map apply.
10.0 MISCELLANEOUS AND GENERAL RULES
This section covers rules that apply in various phases and steps and
so do not fit into the sequence of play format of the rules covered
so far.
[ 10.1 ] IRREGULAR FORCES: These are special types of army
forces that require some special rules.
10.1.1 GUERRILLAS: Guerrillas are special land forces
available to Spain when invaded by an enemy.
10.1.1.1 CREATING GUERRILLA FACTORS: Guerrilla
counters of the appropriate number of factors are placed on the
map under the following conditions:
10.1.1.1.1: Whenever Spain loses a field or limited field combat
involving a Spanish corps inside an unceded Spanish home nation
province, one guerrilla factor is created in that area as soon as the
combat is ended.
10.1.1.1.2: For every unceded Spanish province containing an
unbesieged enemy corps and/or garrison during the Spanish
Guerrilla Step, a die is rolled. For every point the die is lower than
that province's guerrilla value (printed on the map in parenthesis
next to Spanish provincial tax/manpower values) one guerrilla
factor is placed in an area in that province.
10.1.1.2 ANTI-GUERRILLA OPERATIONS: A major power
(major powers using combined movement are treated as one major
power for this purpose) at war with Spain may mount an "anti-
guerrilla operation" during its Guerrilla Step in each Spanish
province occupied by one or more of its corps that did not
participate in any type of land combats during that major power's
Land Combat Step and is not besieged or a besieger. The player
rolls a die for each province. This die roll is modified by +1 if the
major power has two or more corps available for an anti-guerrilla
operation in a province. If the result is higher than the province's
23
8.8.4: Ceding a territory during this step costs the ceding major
power one political point (still only one regardless of the number
of districts in a minor country). Record on the POLITICAL
STATUS DISPLAY on the Status Card.
8.8.5: When a minor Free State is ceded, the new controlling
major power may accept it and all its current forces as a Free
State or immediately remove its forces (army factors are
eliminated, ships are recorded for possible later use as in
10.2.1.1) and change it to a (add a conquered control flag)
conquered minor country.
8.8.6: A ceded province that is ceded back to its original home
nation becomes an unceded province again. A ceded province
that is ceded to any other major power remain a ceded province
[ 8.9 ] THE NEW POLITICAL COMBINATIONS STEP
(OPTIONAL): Skip this step if options 11.1 through 11.6
and/or 11.8 are not used. Otherwise, new political combinations,
additions to these combinations, component parts going neutral
and/or changes in dominant status are determined and announced
during this step.
[ 8.10 ] THE LEVY STEP: New cossack and/or freikorps
counters are placed on the map, if eligible (see 10.1.2.1), excess
cossacks are removed from the map (see 10.1.2.1.1) and (in
December Economic Phases only) feudal and insurrection corps
are brought up to full strength (see 10.1.3.1 and 10.1.4.3).
[ 8.11 ] THE UMP CONTROL STEP: This step is used only at
the end of December Turns in campaign games with less than
seven players (see 14.3) to determine who runs the UMPS.
[ 9.2 ] WINTER ZONE: All areas on the map are in the "winter
zone" (ie., all winter rules apply) except for those in the southern
portion of the map, specifically Morocco, Algeria, Tunisia,
Tripolitania, Cyrenica, Egypt, Palestine, Corfu, Cyprus, Rhodes,
Crete, Malta and Majorca.
guerrilla value, all unbesieged guerrilla factors in any areas of
that province are eliminated. Note that if several different major
powers had corps in the same Spanish province, each could do
this during that major power's Guerrilla Step.
10.1.1.3 USING GUERRILLAS: Guerrillas have a morale
value of 1. They may be used as part or all of city garrisons but
may not be used to garrison depots. They may attack if the
controlling player chooses to use some or all of the guerrilla
factors present in an area, but may not be attacked using the
usual combat procedures unless besieged in a city.
10.1.1.3.1: Guerrillas are not compelled to attack or defend
when occupying an area containing enemy forces.
10.1.1.3.2: Guerrillas may block supply lines but need no supply
themselves unless besieged.
10.1.1.3.3: Guerrillas may besiege cities only in conjunction
with friendly corps.
10.1.1.3.4: Guerrillas may be moved during Spanish Land
Movement Steps only into one adjacent area (regardless of
terrain) each Turn, if they are moved at all. They may never
leave Spain's original home nation borders.
10.1.1.3.5: Guerrillas can be ignored for movement purposes by
enemy forces.
10.1.1.4 GUERRILLA REMOVAL: If there are no enemy
factors inside any unceded Spanish home nation province during
a Spanish Guerrilla Step, all guerrilla factors are removed from
the board.
10.1.2 COSSACKS AND FREIKORPS: Each cossack or
freikorps counter represents one army factor. This factor is a
cavalry factor for all purposes and has morale value of 1. In
scenarios, they are placed as reinforcements when directed by the
scenario instructions.
10.1.2.1 * CREATION OF COSSACKS AND FREIKORPS:
New cossack and freikorps counters, if all allowable counters are
not already on the map, may be placed on the map during a Levy
Step.
10.1.2.1.1 Cossack Placement: One cossack counter is placed in
any Russian-controlled "cossack province" (a cossack province has
a "C" in parenthesis next to the province name on the map), so
long as there would then be no more cossack counters on the map
than there are Russian-controlled cossack provinces.
EXCEPTION: If an enemy corps is inside the Russian home
nation, even if besieged, then there may be up to two cossacks on
the map for each Russian-controlled cossack province. Any excess
is removed by the Russian player during a Levy Step when enemy
corps are no longer inside Russia.
10.1.2.1.2 Freikorps Placement: A new Austrian freikorps
counter is placed in the Vienna area and a new Prussian freikorps
counter is placed in the Berlin area, if those areas are under their
own home nation control and the cities are unbesieged. Freikorps
are only available after certain dates. The Austrian freikorps is
available starting in the March, 1809 Economic Phase and the
Prussian freikorps is available starting in the March, 1813
Economic Phase.
10.1.2.2 USING COSSACKS AND FREIKORIPS: Cossacks
and freikorps have five movement points and may not be forced
marched. They may move through enemy forces and may be
moved through by enemy forces, without being required to stop.
They may not be transported by fleets. Cossacks may move
anywhere they can reach and are allowed by the rules, but
freikorps may operate only within their home nation's original
border and in areas currently controlled by their major power.
10.1.2.2.1: Cossacks and freikorps block enemy supply but do not
need to be supplied themselves unless besieged.
10.1.2.2.2: When a cossack or freikorps ends its movement in an
area containing enemy field forces it must initiate an attack.
10.1.2.2.3: When unbesieged cossack and/or freikorps that are
alone in an area and are themselves attacked, the controlling
player(s) may, if desired, automatically retreat them before any
combat occurs into any adjacent area not containing an unbesieged
enemy corps. EXCEPTIONS: If attacked by a force containing at
least one enemy corps with a cavalry symbol, cossacks and/or
freikorps may only retreat before combat if their controlling
player(s) rolls a 4 or less on one die (roll once for the cossacks,
regardless of the number of cossack counters present). This system
is also used when cossacks/freikorps are with corps attempting to
withdraw (see 7.5.2.5.2.2). Opposing cossacks/freikorps must fight
a trivial combat if alone (no other forces from either side) together
in an area.
10.1.3 TURKISH FEUDAL TROOPS: Turkey differs from the
other major powers in that it purchases army factors and ships only
for the Janissary, Imperial Cavalry and Nizami-Cedid corps and
fleets. Turkish feudal corps (infantry and cavalry) start the game at
full strength in feudal infantry or cavalry factors.
10.1.3.1 RAISING FEUDAL FACTORS: All army factors in the
feudal corps are raised in an annual "levy." During the Levy Step
of a December Economic Phase, the Turkish player may elect to
bring any or all of the feudal corps up to full strength by removing
them from any location (even if eliminated and/or off the map) to
any area in the province of their origin (the province for which the
feudal corps is named). This may not be done if that province
contains an unbesieged enemy corps, if it is controlled by another
major power or if the feudal corps in question is besieged.
10.1.3.2 STANDING DOWN FEUDAL CORPS: During the
year the Turkish major power may "stand down" (ie., remove from
the map) any or all feudal corps (feudal infantry and feudal
cavalry) during Turkey's Land Movement Step without altering
their army factor strengths. A feudal corps may not stand down if
besieged.
10.1.3.3 RETURNING FEUDAL CORPS THAT STAND
DOWN: Any feudal corps that stands down may be placed back
on the map during any later Turkish Land Movement Step.
10.1.3.3.1: A feudal corps that stands down may only be placed
back on the map in its home province if that home province does
24
not contain an unbesieged enemy corps or is not controlled by
another major power.
10.1.3.3.2: A corps may not move on the same Turn it is placed
back on the map.
10.1.3.4 USING FEUDAL CORPS: Feudal corps perform like
other corps except that they may neither detach, exchange, or
absorb army factors.
10.1.3.5 FEUDAL CORPS PROVINCES: The Crimean,
Podolian and Transylvanian feudal corps are available only if the
province of the same name is ceded to Turkey. Feudal corps
from any provinces ceded by Turkey to other major powers are
lost while ceded-Turkey cannot use the feudal corps nor can it be
used by the major power to which the province was ceded.
10.1.3.6 FEUDAL CORPS MAINTENANCE: Maintenance
must be paid only for feudal corps actually on the map during a
Money and Manpower Expenditure Step of an Economic Phase.
Feudal corps not then on the map, even if placed during the
following three months, do not have to be purchased.
10.1.4 AUSTRIAN INSURRECTION CORPS: The Austrian
major power has two insurrection corps available.
10.1.4.1 PLACING INSURRECTION CORPS: Immediately
after an enemy corps, cossack or freikorps has entered certain
Austrian border provinces, the triggers the possible placement of
the insurrection corps and the Austrian player may (if desired)
place on-map either or both insurrection corps anywhere within
that province, at their current strength. These border provinces
are Illyria, Military Border, Transylvania and Hungary. These
border provinces are not eligible for insurrection corps activation
if the province is currently ceded.
10.1.4.1.1: If the corps are placed in the area containing the
enemy corps, that enemy corps (but not cossack or freikorps)
would have to cease its movement.
10.1.4.1.2: Insurrection corps need not be placed at the first
opportunity and so could cut supply chains if corps, cossacks or
freikorps later activate their placement by crossing a border into
an eligible Austrian border province.
10.1.4.1.3: Insurrection corps may only move within these four
border provinces, even if they are ceded (subject to access rules-
see 10.3). If compelled to retreat out of these border provinces
they must immediately stand down.
10.1.4.1.4: Insurrection corps may not move during the same
Turn they are placed on the map.
10.1.4.2 USING INSURRECTION CORPS: In other respects
insurrection corps are treated similarly to Turkish feudal corps-
they may not detach, absorb or exchange factors; they may stand
down during Austria's Land Movement Step unless besieged or
as a result of a retreat (see 10. 1.4.1.3). However, after standing
down, they may not be placed on the map except by using the
activation procedure in 10. 1.4. 1.
10.1.4.3 * RAISING INSURRECTION CORPS FACTORS:
Insurrection corps are brought up to their full strength of 15
militia and 3 regular cavalry factors (even if off map), only
during the Levy Step of the December Economic Phase, if not
then besieged, so long as any one of the four border provinces is
Austrian controlled and contains no unbesieged enemy corps.
Unlike Turkish feudal corps, the factors in the insurrection corps
are treated as normal Austrian militia and regular cavalry factors
(although they may not be detached).
10.1.4.4 * INSURRECTION CORPS MAINTENANCE:
Maintenance must be paid only for insurrection corps actually on
the map during a Money and Manpower Expenditure Step.
Insurrection corps not then on the map, even if placed during the
following three months, do not have to be purchased.
10.1.5 THE AUSTRIAN TYROLEAN REVOLT CORPS: If
a major power to which the Tyrol province has been ceded goes
to war with Austria, the Austrian player may, during any
Austrian Land Movement Step, place the Tyrol corps marker in
any Tyrol area that does not contain an enemy corps. The Tyrol
corps may not be moved during the same step in which it is
placed on the map.
10.1.5.1 TYROL CORPS STRENGTH AND USE: The Tyrol
corps has an initial strength of eight Austrian regular infantry
factors and, once placed, can be used the same as any other
Austrian corps, detaching and absorbing army factors, getting
infantry factors as reinforcements, etc.
10.1.5.1.1 *: Maintenance must be paid for the corps during every
Money and Manpower Expenditure Step that it is on the map.
10.1.5.1.2: If the corps counter is removed from the map for any
reason, it cannot be placed on the map again for the remainder of
the war that triggered its placement.
10.1.5.2 TYROL CORPS REMOVAL *: When peace is made
between Austria and the major power that held (and may still hold)
Tyrol province, the Tyrol corps and any infantry factors it may
hold at that time is removed from the map. It may be introduced
again, at its full strength of 8 infantry factors, if there is another,
later war that again triggers its availability, etc.
[ 10.2 ] * MINOR COUNTRIES AND CEDED PROVINCES
CONTROL:
10.2.1 THE CONQUEST OF MINOR COUNTRIES: A minor
country is conquered by one month's unbesieged occupation of its
capital. The old control flag is changed for a conquered control
flag of the new controlling Major Power to show the new control
during the Conquest Step.
10.2.1.1: When a minor country is conquered by a major power,
the minor country's surviving land forces (except for Poland-see
11.1.3.3) are considered to be eliminated and removed from the
map. Minor country fleets are removed, but remain at their current
ship strength and the fleet and ships are available as soon as that
minor country again becomes a minor Free State. While off-map,
no maintenance is paid and factors and ships may not be added.
10.2.1.2: A minor country conquest gains the conqueror one
political point per district (see 10.4) and costs the major power
from which the country was conquered one political point per
district. Record on the POI-ITICAI- STATUS DISPI-AY on the
Status Card.
10.2.1.3: If a major power is not at war with another major power
when a minor country it has been selected to run captures army
factors of that other major power, those army factors must be
returned immediately when the minor country is conquered or the
war lapses (see 4.4.6. 1).
10.2.2 CONQUERING CEDED PROVINCES: A major power
may conquer a ceded province (even if not originally owned by
that major power) exactly as if it were a minor country, unless the
original owner controls it again, in which case it again becomes an
unceded province. An unceded province may never be conquered.
A major power may cede provinces only as part of a formal
(conditional or unconditional) peace (see peace terms B.7 and
C.4). Conquest of a ceded province does not gain or lose political
points.
[ 10.3 ] * FORCES IN OTHER COUNTRIES-ACCESS:
10.3.1 ACCESS: "Access" is one country permitting another
country's forces to operate in the first country's territory. There
may be limitations on this access.
10.3.1.1 MINOR COUNTRY ACCESS: Any major power may
move forces and trace supply through a neutral minor country. A
major power may not also build depots and/or occupy cities in a
minor country unless that major power is at war with or controls
that minor country.
10.3.1.2 MAJOR POWER ACCESS: A major power may only
move through another major power's territory with that major
power's permission (called "voluntary access") or, without
permission, if at war with that major power or if peace condition
C.5 applies.
10.3.1.2.1 General Access Rules: Once inside another's province
or controlled minor country, the voluntary access permission to be
there may not be rescinded (unless war between the major power's
negates the agreements).
10.3.1.2.1.1: Other corps or forces may be denied entry, but
those already there must be allowed to move, detach
garrisons and place depots as desired within any conditions
already set.
10.3.1.2.1.2: Forces may not be granted voluntary access to
move through a major power's territory and then denied
permission to return by the same route and under the same
conditions.
10.3.1.2.1.3: Neutral forces that previously had access in
territory that has changed control (i.e., due to reconquest or
ceding) can be given voluntary access under any new
25
conditions granted by the new controlling major power
(unconditional access MUST be given if peace condition
C.5 applies between the involved major powers). If no
access is given or available, the neutral forces must be
handled as with force repatriation (see 4.4.6.2 and/or
option 12.4). Gen 23/4
10.3.1.2.2 Voluntary Access Limitations: Voluntary access
permission might be limited by specifying only certain provinces
through which movement is permitted. "Conditional access" is
also possible (eg., access only if at war with a particular country,
etc.). This is up to the players, who may wish to put the
conditions in writing. The player having access must obey the
conditions set. The player through whose territory access is
desired may set any conditions (eg., whether the moving major
power can leave garrisons, build depots, payment for the
privilege, etc.).
10.3.1.2.3 Unconditional Access: Access gained as a peace
condition (see C.S on the VICTORY CONDITIONS CHART on
the Game Card) is "unconditional access" and no restrictions
other than those in peace condition C.5 can be imposed.
10.3.2 CITY OCCUPATION: The nationality of a city garrison
determines who controls the city for combat purposes, regardless
of the major power formally controlling the province or minor
country in which the city is located. For example, a Russian
garrison in a French port city allows the Russian player to
determine if the port's harbour defences are used against
attacking fleets.
10.3.2.1: If a city has a garrison consisting of army factors from
more than one major power, control is with the major power
formally controlling the province or minor country. If no army
factors of the major power formally controlling the province are
present, control for combat purposes can be decided by mutual
agreement among the players with army factors present or, if
agreement is impossible, by competitive die rolls with no
modifiers. If garrisons in the same city suddenly find themselves
at war due to a declaration of war, IMMEDIATELY determine
city control by trivial combat between the hostile garrison forces.
Gen 27/2
10.3.2.2: If there is no garrison, the city is controlled by major
power or neutral minor country which controls the territory in
which the city is located-port cities without garrisons may not
use their harbour defences.
10.3.3 NEUTRAL GARRISONS IN ENEMY TERRITORY:
Neutral garrisons or portions of garrisons (army factors
belonging to a major power not at war with any of the besieging
corps) in a city belonging to an enemy of a besieging corps must
surrender as soon as a siege of the city is announced. These
surrendered army factors and corps are automatically
"exchanged" and automatically returned to the map as
reinforcements during the surrendered forces next Army
Reinforcement Step.
10.3.4 FORCIBLE ACCESS: If a major power is denied
voluntary access or denied desired access conditions, its land
forces may still be moved into or through desired areas by using
"forcible access," as follows:
10.3.4.1: Forcible access operates under the same restrictions as
access through neutral minor countries (see 10.3.1.1).
10.3.4.2: A phasing major power loses one political point per
Turn for EACH major power's territories in which forcible
access is used. For example, during a Turn, French counters are
moved through some Bavarian and Saxon areas using forcible
access. France loses one political points if both these minor
countries are controlled by Prussia, but loses two political points
if Bavaria is Austrian-controlled and Saxony is Prussian-
controlled.
10.3.4.3: The major power controlling territory in which forcible
access occurs may, if desired, IMMEDIATELY declare war and
lose the requisite political points for EACH separate declaration
on any or all of the major powers using forcible access in its
territory, unless prevented by limitation in 4.2.2.1. This chance
to declare war is repeated each time a counter using forcible
access is moved. If war is declared, allies may be called as in
4.3. Gen 23/4
[ 10.4 ] * MINOR COUNTRIES WITH DISTRICTS: Some
minor countries are unusual in that they consist of two or more
"districts " while most minor countries have only one district.
10.4.1 COUNTRY COMPOSITION: These minor countries
have a "major" district (which gives its name to the whole minor
power) and a "secondary" district. The minor country Denmark
consists of the major district of Denmark (capital Copenhagen) and
the secondary district of Norway (capital Christiana). Similarly,
there is the major district of Sweden (capital Stockholm) and the
secondary district of Finland (capital Abo). Others can occur if
optional rules 11.4 and 11.7 are used.
10.4.1.1 ADDITIONAL COUNTRIES WITH SECONDARY
DISTRICS: The following minor countries may have
secondary districts added to them. There are no PP gained for
adding a secondary district. These states remain in existence
for purposes of rule 10.4.3.2 until the primary district is
conquered by another major power.
10.4.1.1.1 Egypt-Palestine: If the Ottoman Empire does not
exist, Palestine may be added to Egypt as a secondary district.
The subsequent creation of the Ottoman Empire by another
power does not dissolve Egypt-Palestine. DB, MLB & JJ
10.4.1.1.2 Sweden-Norway: Norway can be made a secondary
district of Sweden. This can be done regardless of whether
Finland is also a secondary district of Sweden. Norway cannot
be transferred to either Sweden or Denmark if it is presently a
secondary district of the other. DB & JJ
10.4.1.1.3 Tripolitania-Cyrenaica: Cyrenaica may be a secondary
district of Tripolitania. The Tripolitania-Cyrenaica multi-district
minor (called Libya) exists at the start of the 1792 and 1805
campaigns. Once it is dissolved it may not be recreated. DB & JJ
10.4.2 DECLARATIONS OF WAR: Major Powers may not
separately declare war on a neutral secondary district while it is
still part of the neutral combined minor country. For example, a
declaration of war on Sweden is also considered a declaration of
war on Finland (unless Finland has already been conquered). The
cost in political points to declare war on neutral minor countries
with more than one district is one political point per district.
10.4.3 CONTROL: Whoever is given control of, or conquers, the
major district of one of these minor countries is also automatically
given control of, or conquers, the secondary district with no need
to independently conquer the. secondary district capital.
10.4.3.1: The control of a secondary district is not given to the
controller of the major district if a secondary district is already
controlled by a different major power.
10.4.3.2: It is possible for one major power to conquer a secondary
district (by controlling its capital) while another major power
controls the major district For example, one major power can
conquer Norway, by controlling Christiana while another major
power conquers Denmark (the district) by controlling
Copenhagen. When this happens, Sweden is considered a separate
minor country from Finland, Denmark is considered a separate
minor country from Norway, etc. until a secondary district satisfies
the conditions of returning to neutrality (eg., the controlling major
power is in the Fiasco Zone of the POLITICAL STATUS
DISPLAY-see 10. 5. 2). The secondary district does not in this
case revert to neutrality but immediately reverts to the control of
the major power controlling the major district or (if also neutral) to
the control of the major district to again form a multi-district minor
country. For example, Norway reverts to the control of the major
power controlling Denmark (as part of the controlled-Danish Free
State), or, if Denmark is also neutral, Norway would again become
a part of combined neutral Denmark minor country
10.4.4 CORPS AND FLEETS: The major power controlling the
major districts of these minor countries controls their corps and
fleets. For example, Finland and Norway have no corps and fleets
and, when separate, these secondary districts must be treated as
conquered minor countries. EXCEPTION: see option 11.7 for
Naples and Sicily, if used. When a secondary district is a part of its
combined minor Free State its manpower and money values can be
used to purchase that minor Free State's ships and army factors.
For example, when Norway is a province of Denmark its
manpower and money values (all doubled-see 8.2.3) can be used to
purchase Danish ships and army factors.
26
[ 10.5 ] THE POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY: Each major
power has an initial starting position on this Status Card display
as given in the campaign games. That position is altered by
winning or losing combats, by gaining formal allies or breaking
alliances, being surrendered to or surrendering, declaring war
upon a country, becoming bankrupt, economic manipulation, by
conquering a minor country or having one conquered from you
or by being selected to run it, etc. See the POLITICAL POINTS
CHART on the back of this rulebook and the appropriate rules
sections to find the reasons for and the extent of these
adjustments.
10.5.1 ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE: When political points
are adjusted, all positive adjustments require the major power's
political status marker to be moved that number of spaces along
the display from left to right (the zone lines are contiguous eg.,
the right hand end of the Neutral Zone joins the left hand end of
the Dominant Zone). Similarly, negative adjustments require the
marker to be moved from right to left along the display. A major
power's political status marker cannot be adjusted off either end
of the POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY, but remains at the end
until adjusted away by gains or losses. If a major power would
have been forced off the lower end of the display, then that
major power must sue for peace during the next Peace Step with
every major power at war with it (only a conditional surrender
has to be accepted).
10.5.2 LOCATED IN THE INSTABILITY/FIASCO
ZONES: When a Money and Manpower Collection Step of an
Economic Phase finds a major power's political status marker in
a box in the Instability or Fiasco Zones, a die may have to be
rolled by that major power's controlling player. No die roll is
necessary if there is no economic loss number in the box. If the
roll is not greater than the economic loss number found in the
political status marker's box then only half the available major
power money and manpower values are collected by that major
power (rounding fractions up) and its minor Free States collect
only their printed values, not the normal doubled amounts. The
value of trade is unaffected. Other effects are:
10.5.2.1 BEING IN THE INSTABILITY ZONE: If a major
power commences the Minor Country Control Step of a Political
Phase in the Instability Zone of the display, all of the conquered
minor countries of that major power become neutral, unless there
is an unbesieged corps or a 5 infantry garrison JJ of that major
power in the minor country. EXCEPTIONS: see options
11.2.3.2, 11.5.3.2 and 11.6.3.2.
10.5.2.2 BEING IN THE FIASCO ZONE: If a major power
commences a Minor Country Control Step in the Fiasco Zone all
controlled minor countries of that major power will become
neutral regardless of occupation attempts, including minor Free
States.
10.5.2.3 CHANGING CONTROL: If an enemy corps is
located in the minor country and/or an enemy garrison is in the
minor country at these times, the minor country does not become
neutral but is transferred to the control of that enemy major
power instead (resolve control by competitive die rolls -as in
8.7.4 if two or more different enemy major power forces occupy
the minor country). Free States whose control is transferred
become conquered minor countries. When a minor Free State
becomes neutral or its control changes, all of its forces are
removed, but a note is kept of its current fleet strength (which
will become available if the minor country later again becomes a
Free State). Garrison factors (NOT corps, freikorps, or cossacks
in garrison) of the former controlling major power MUST be
immediately removed from the minor country using the honors
of war rules (see 7.5.4.1.2.3.1--in this case, it can be done by
Spanish and Turkish garrisons). Gen 25/4
10.5.2.4 POLITICAL POINTS FOR CHANGED
CONTROL: No political points are lost when a major power
loses control of minor countries in this way. However, all major
powers who have the control of a minor country (regardless of
the number of districts) transferred to them gain a political point.
10.5.3 STATUS MODIFIERS: The status modifiers at the side
of the POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY are the die roll
modifiers used (in addition to any others) when dicing to
determine who will, run a particular neutral minor country that
has been attacked (see 4.6.2 and 4.6.3) or when using the
Uncontrolled Major Power (UMP) rules (see 14.3). The status
modifiers number next to the zone line a major power's political
status marker occupies is used.
[ 10.6 ] LEADERS AND COMMANDERS: The leaders in the
game represent historical personalities who held major commands
during the Napoleonic Wars. All leaders, except NELSON, must
always be stacked with a corps of that major power or controlled
minor power when on the map. NELSON must always be stacked
with a fleet(s) of the British major power or British-controlled
minor country. A player may not voluntarily cause his leader to
become unstacked. Where a leader becomes unstacked due to
foraging losses or disbanding, the leader is removed from the
board and is returned in any later Army Reinforcement Step
(Naval Reinforcement Step for NELSON). Leaders do not need
supply and, except for NELSON, may be transported on fleets only
if stacked with a corps.
10.6.1 LEADERS WHO ARE COMMANDERS: The leader in
charge of a force is called the "commander." If no leader is
present, the best corps intrinsic ratings (there intrinsic ratings
reflect the abilities of the corps commanders) of the corps present
is used. Fleets have no intrinsic ratings. These intrinsic strategic
and tactical ratings can be found on the reverse of the counters and
minor countries' intrinsic ratings are those of their controlling
major power. If no corps is present, garrisons, cossacks and
guerrillas have an intrinsic tactical and strategic rating of zero.
Note that Prussian strategic ratings differ in 1805-1809 from 1810
and later.
10.6.1.1 CHOOSING OR DETERMINING A COMMANDER:
If there is only one leader present on a side at a combat, that leader
automatically commands. Otherwise, the commander is
determined as follows:
10.6.1.1.1 Commanders For Allied Armies: If several leaders are
present on the same side at a combat then the leader commanding
the whole army must be a leader of the major power with the
greatest number of corps present. If there are equal greatest
numbers, the major power providing the leader may be chosen by
the controlling players by mutual agreement from among those
major powers or by competitive unmodified die rolls.
10.6.1.1.2 Commanders Among Other Leaders: If there are
several leaders from the one major power, the leader with the
highest seniority rating is chosen. "A" is a senior rating to "B" is a
senior rating to "C" is a senior rating to "D" If there is more than
one leader of the same highest seniority rating then the controlling
player may choose which leader to use.
10.6.1.1.3 Reinforcing Leaders Taking Command: If a
reinforcing leader arrives during a combat, it takes command only
if from the same major power as the present commander and has a
higher seniority rating or if there is currently no leader.
10.6.1.2 COMMANDER USES: The commander chosen will be
used for all purposes in combats and only that leader's strategic
and tactical ratings will be used.
10.6.1.2.1 Tactical Maximum Ratings: Each leader has a
"tactical maximum rating." If commanding more corps than this
rating, the leader's tactical rating is reduced by -1, and if
commanding more corps than twice this rating the leader's tactical
rating is reduced by -2. Regardless of the number of corps
commanded, the tactical rating can never be modified to below
zero. For example if Napoleon, with a tactical maximum rating of
6 and a tactical rating of 5 , commands seven to twelve corps, the
tactical rating is reduced from 5 to 4. If Napoleon commands
thirteen or more corps, the tactical rating is reduced from 5 to 3.
Corps included in an outflanking force are counted for determining
a commander's tactical rating.
10.6.1.2.2 Tactical Ratings Comparisons: The opposing
commanders' ratings (which may be modified if tactical maximum
ratings are exceeded) are compared on the COMMANDER
CHART on the Game Card, which gives a 0, +1 or -1 die roll
modifier for attacker and defender in a combat round. The tactical
rating is calculated round by round (ie., reinforcements may
change the commanders' tactical ratings from round to round).
10.6.1.3 COMMANDERS FOR PUIRSUIT: For pursuits, the
combat commander is not necessarily the leader used. Any leader
with a cavalry leader symbol may be used to modify the pursuit
27
(see 7.5.2.10.2) as long as at least one factor of that leader's
nationality is pursuing.
10.6.2 LEADER MOVEMENT: Leaders may move by
spending their entire movement with a corps (fleet for
NELSON) with which they began the Land or Naval Movement
Step. Alternatively, a leader may be retired from the map during
the appropriate Reinforcement Step (unless in a besieged city-a
besieged port city must also be blockaded to prevent a leader's
retirement) and then placed with any unbesieged corps (fleet for
NELSON) of its major power in any later appropriate
Reinforcement Step.
10.6.3 LEADER CAPTURE: When all factors on a side or in a
pinning force with which a leader is present are eliminated by
combat that leader is captured by any major power on the
opposing side of the owning player's choice. If a leader becomes
unstacked through losses incurred during besieged supply, the
leader is captured by the besieging major power of the owning
player's choice. Captured leaders must be returned as an effect of
peace (see 4.4.6.1) and may be returned earlier at the option of
the capturing player, the leader being placed on the board in any
later appropriate Reinforcement Steps.
10.6.4 * RETURNING LEADERS: When a leader is removed
from the game under peace condition C. 6, that leader can only
be returned to the game in one of two ways:
10.6.4.1: If the removed leader's major power ever occupies the
Fiasco Zone on the POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY on the
Status Card at the end of the Manipulation Step of an Economic
Phase, the leader is eligible to be returned to the map for normal
use during the next or any later Reinforcement Phase.
10.6.4.2: If the major power is not in the Fiasco Zone at the end
of a Manipulation Step (see 8.4.3), the controlling player may, if
desired, drop a number of political points equal to the total of the
removed leader's strategic plus tactical ratings numbers
(EXCEPTION: the NELSON leader, with no ratings numbers,
can be returned for a drop of 1 0 political points). If this is done,
the leader is eligible to be returned to the map for normal use
during the next or any later Reinforcement Phase.
10.6.5 THE BERNADOTTE LEADER: The
"BERNADOTTE" leader counter has two sides and is available
as a French leader (use the French blue side of the counter) from
1805 to the August, 1810 Turn. At the start of the Army
Reinforcement Step of the August, 1810 Turn, the French player
must give this leader counter (even if besieged) to the major
power controlling Sweden (use the gray side of the counter from
now on). The major power controlling Sweden may now place
the counter on the map during this or any later Land
Reinforcement Step. The BERNADOTTE leader counter is now
a Swedish leader and can be used with any of the corps of the
major power controlling Sweden (which could change if control
of Sweden changes).
10.6.5.1: If BERNADOTTE was "killed" or France went into
civil disorder prior to August, 1810, the BERNADOTTE leader
counter does not become a Swedish leader.
10.6.5.2: If Sweden is or becomes neutral after BERNADOTTE
becomes a Swedish leader, the BERNADOTTE leader is kept
off the map and can be placed when the rest of the Swedish
forces are placed.
[ 10.7 ] * DARDANELLES CONTROL: Normally, the major
power controlling Constantinople controls access through the
Dardanelles sea area (see 6.2.1.3 and 8.2.1.2.1.3 for results of
control), but if Constantinople is besieged, no one controls
access through the Dardanelles. Note that this makes it possible
for any major powers to pass through the Dardanelles and also
makes it possible for enemy fleets to enter the area to reach the
Constantinople blockade box.
[ 10.8 ] SETTLING DISPUTES: Although it is pointed out in
numerous places throughout the rules that major powers with
conflicting and equal claims may settle their disputes through
mutual agreement or through competitive die, rolls (sometimes
modified), other cases can arise that are not mentioned
elsewhere. In all these cases, if a mutual agreement cannot be
reached, let unmodified competitive die rolls decide. for
example, if leaders or army factors are captured by mixed forces
controlled by more than one major power, the control over the
"prisoners" can be decided by mutual agreement or, if agreement
OPTIONAL RULES
The optional rules are just that-optional-and may be used or not used in any combinations desired by the players of the game.
Their use is suggested only for experienced players of the game.
11.0 NEW POLITICAL COMBINATIONS
The Napoleonic Wars saw many changes in the map of Europe,
some proving to be only temporary and others proving to be more
permanent. These options permit players to recreate some of these
changes by arranging new combinations of minor countries and/or
ceded provinces to form new "super" minor Free States and also
permit the possibility that any major power can become dominant
in Europe. In all cases, these changes are declared by the
controlling player during the New Political Combinations Step of
an Economic Phase (covers 11.l - 11 6 and 11.8).
[ 11.1 ] POLAND (GRAND DUCHY OF WARSAW): Poland,
once one of Europe's great powers, had been dissolved, carved up
and divided into separate provinces by Austria, Prussia and Russia
in the 1790s. The Poles hoped to regain their independence and
loyally supported Napoleon after he created the "Grand Duchy of
Warsaw."
11.1.1 CREATING POLAND: If any (the Poles will accept
anyone's help) major power controls two or more possible Polish
(marked "P" next to the province names on the map) provinces
including Masovia and no other major power holds the Polish
loyalty marker, then the Polish Free State may be declared by that
major power with Warsaw as the Polish Free State capital.
11.1.1.1 POLISH PROVINCES: The exact Polish ("P")
provinces making up the Polish Free State must be announced
when the creation is declared. In the cases of Austria, Prussia or
Russia, any of their own home nation provinces included as part of
Poland are then considered to be ceded provinces that are part of
Poland. Once established, a controlling major power may, if
desired, add additional controlled "P" provinces to Poland during
later New Political Combinations Steps. East and/or West Galicia
may be part of a Russian-controlled Poland. Gen 25/4
11.1.1.2 MARKING CONTROL: The controlling major power
places one of its own Free State flags and the "Poland" political
marker anywhere in Poland and takes and holds the Polish loyalty
marker to indicate Polish loyalty.
11.1.2 USING POLAND: Once created, Poland is a normal minor
Free State of whatever size and total money and manpower values
has been determined. The combined money and manpower values
of its component provinces are doubled in value (as in any minor
Free State-see 8.2.3) and used for the usual purposes. Polish
garrison infantry factors may be placed anywhere within Polish
territory.
11.1.3 CONQUERING THE POLISH FREE STATE: The
Polish minor Free State may only be conquered by the unbesieged
occupation of Warsaw for a month (as per 10.2), after which the
occupying major power places a conquered flag in each province
that defines Poland and the Poland political marker and the
previous major power's state are removed.
11.1.3.1. Once Poland is conquered, the provinces that were part of
the Polish Free State are now considered unceded provinces, if
now controlled by their home nation major power, or ceded
provinces, if controlled by another major power.
11.1.3.2: Polish provinces other than Masovia may be
independently conquered and treated as in 10.2.2. If a Polish Free
State becomes neutral, it is treated as a multi-district minor country
(see 10.4-Masovia is the major district) except that declarations of
war and assuming control are both worth only one political point,
regardless of the number of component provinces. With a neutral
Poland, no one holds the Polish loyalty marker.
11.1.3.3: If, when Poland is conquered, there are still remaining
Polish forces, Poland may not be declared a minor Free State by
the new conquering major power. If any Polish forces remain, they
28
cannot be reached, by competitive die rolls (roll for each factor
or leader over which there is a disagreement).
remain in the control of the original controlling major power
until all Polish army factors are lost or any type of peace is made
between the major power that conquered Poland and the major
power holding the Polish loyalty marker, at which time the
former controlling-major power relinquishes control of the
Polish loyalty marker. The conquering major power may then, if
desired, again declare Poland a minor Free State (see 11.1.1)
during any later New Political Combination Step.
11.1.4 CEDING POLAND: If Poland is ceded, either
voluntarily, or as a peace condition, it must be ceded as a unit.
The controlling player may not separate individual Polish
provinces for individual ceding or other purposes. When ceded,
the Poland political marker, Polish loyalty marker and any Polish
forces are also ceded and the accompanying Free State flag is
changed to show the new controlling major power. If desired, the
new controlling player may choose to handle Poland as in 8.8.5,
changing it to conquered status, although, in this case, the
component provinces become ceded and/or unceded provinces,
depending on the controlling major power.
11.1.5 POLITICAL POINTS: Poland is worth 1 point to create
or to conquer (capture Warsaw). The loss of a controlled Poland
costs 1 political point, whether to conquest or by ceding.
[ 11.2 ] THE KINGDOM OF ITALY: Italy had been divided
numerous small countries since the middle ages. Napoleon
created the Kingdom of Italy (actually encompassing only
northern Italy) to solidify support among the Italians.
11.2.1 CREATING THE KINGDOM OF ITALY: The
Kingdom of Italy can be created only by Austria, France or
Spain. The Kingdom of Italy consists of the minor countries of
Lombardy, Romagna Not papacy MU & MLB and Venetia and
the province of Illyria. If Austria creates the kingdom, Illyria
province, although not actually ceded, is then considered to be
part of the Kingdom of Italy and its money and manpower
values are not counted for Austrian money and manpower. If
Austria, France or Spain controls all four of these, then the
Kingdom of Italy may be declared by the controlling major
power.
11.2.1.1: Control is marked by placing a controlling major
power Free State flag and the "K. of Italy" political marker
anywhere in the kingdom.
11.2.1.2: Whenever the major power controlling the Kingdom of
Italy regains control of territory that could be part of the
kingdom, this territory must be added to the Kingdom of Italy
during the next New Political Combinations Step.
11.2.2 USING THE KINGDOM OF ITALY: Once created,
the Kingdom of Italy is generally treated as a normal minor Free
State. The combined money and manpower of its component
parts are doubled (as in any minor Free State-see 8.2.3) in value
and used in any desired way for the usual purposes. The
combined money and manpower may be used to purchase army
and/or ship factors for the corps, garrisons or fleets of either
Lombardy or Venetia. Garrison factors from the Kingdom of
Italy may be placed anywhere within its territory. In addition:
11.2.2.1: If France controls the Kingdom of Italy, the Lombardy
and Venetian corps have a movement allowance of 4. If this
option is used, these corps do not get a 4 movement allowance
simply for being French-controlled (see 7.3. 1. 1)-the Kingdom
of Italy must be created for their movement allowance to be
increased.
11.2.2.2: When the Kingdom of Italy is created the controlling
major power gets the Venetia fleet counter and its current
number of ships. This fleet and ships are not available to the major
power controlling Venetia unless that major power also controls
the Kingdom of Italy.
11.2.3 CONQUERING THE KINGDOM OF ITALY: The
component parts of the Kingdom of Italy are still treated as
separate minor Free States and a ceded province for purposes of
conquering it. However, as long as the Kingdom of Italy's
controlling major power still controls at least one component
minor country with corps, the Kingdom of Italy still exists
(consisting of whatever territory remains).
11.2.3.1: If the last component minor country with corps of the
Kingdom of Italy goes neutral, is ceded or is conquered the
kingdom will cease to exist and will become separate parts (either
neutral or under control, as the case may be) again. If not
otherwise controlled, Illyria province returns to Austrian control
or, if Austria no longer exists, Illyria goes to the major power
controlling Austria province. The Kingdom of Italy political
marker and the previous major power's Free State flag are removed
when the kingdom goes neutral or ceases to exist and/or is ceded.
11.2.3.2: Rule 10.5.2.2 is modified when applying to the minor
country components in the Kingdom of Italy. Instead of the
component minor countries automatically going neutral during a
Minor Country Control Step, they only need to be checked during
a New Political Combinations Step. If in the Fiasco Zone during a
New Political Combinations Step, one die is rolled for each of the
component minor countries. Failure to roll higher than the
economic loss number means that the component minor country
goes neutral (or changes control-see 10.5.2.3); otherwise there is
no effect. NOTE: No die rolls are made if there is no economic
loss number in the Fiasco, Zone box or for Illyria province.
11.2.4 CEDING THE KINGDOM OF ITALY: If the Kingdom
of Italy's territories are ceded, either voluntarily or as a peace
condition, they are ceded as separate minor countries and/or a
province. The political marker is never ceded, only removed if the
conditions for the kingdom's existence end-if the kingdom is gone,
then it must be recreated as in 11.2.1 to exist again.
11.2.5 POLITICAL POINTS: The Kingdom of Italy is worth one
political point to create. Individually gaining or losing parts of it
gain/cost the usual political points for conquering/losing minor
countries/provinces (see 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.2).
[ 11.3 ] * THE KINGDOM OF WESTPHALIA: The numerous
small states of north western Germany were tempting prizes to the
major powers that vied for their control. Napoleon created the
Kingdom of Westphalia to consolidate his control in this area.
11.3.1 CREATING THE KINGDOM OF WESTPHALIA: The
Kingdom of Westphalia can be created only by France or Prussia.
The Kingdom of Westphalia consists of the minor countries of
Hanover and Hesse and the province of Magdeburg, If Prussia
creates the kingdom, Magdeburg province, although not actually
ceded, is then considered to be part of the Kingdom of Westphalia
and its money and manpower values are not counted for Prussian
money and manpower. If France or Prussia controls all three of
these, then the Kingdom of Westphalia may be declared by the
controlling major power.
11.3.1.1: Control is marked by placing a controlling major power
Free State flag and the "K. of Westphalia", political marker
anywhere in the kingdom.
11.3.1.2: Whenever the major power controlling the Kingdom of
Westphalia gains control of territory that could be part of the
kingdom, this territory must be added to the Kingdom of
Westphalia during the next New Political Combinations Step.
11.3.2 USING THE KINGDOM OF WESTPHALIA: Once
created, the Kingdom of Westphalia is generally treated as a
normal minor Free State. The combined money and manpower of
its component parts are doubled in value (as in any minor Free
State-see 8.2.3) and used in any desired manner for the usual
purposes. In addition:
11.3.2.1: If France controls the Kingdom of Westphalia, the
Hanover and Hesse corps have a movement allowance of 4. If this
option is used, these corps do not get a 4 movement allowance
simply for being French-controlled (see 7.3. 1. 1)-the Kingdom of
Westphalia must be created for their movement allowance to be
increased (NOTE: movement is also increased if the Kingdom of
Westphalia is not created, but Hanover and/or Hesse are
29
incorporated as part of the Confederation of the Rhine - see
11.5.2.1).
11.3.2.2: The money from Magdeburg province can be used for
any purpose, but its manpower can be used only to purchase
Hanoverian infantry and cavalry factors.
11.3.2.3: Only Hessian infantry can be used as minor country
garrisons within Hesse. Only Hanoverian infantry can be used as
minor country garrisons within Hanover and Magdeburg. If
Hanover is NOT part of the Kingdom of Westphalia, Hanoverian
army factors are not available for use by the Kingdom of
Westphalia. Gen 23/4
11.3.3 CONQUERING THE KINGDOM OF
WESTPHALIA: The component parts of the Kingdom of
Westphalia are still treated as separate minor Free States and a
ceded province for purposes of conquering it. However, as long
as the Kingdom of Westphalia's controlling major power still
controls at least one component minor country with corps, the
Kingdom of Westphalia still exists (consisting of whatever
territory remains)
11.3.3.1: If the last component minor country with corps of the
Kingdom of Westphalia goes neutral, is ceded or is conquered,
the kingdom will cease to exist and will become separate parts
(either neutral or under control, as the case may be) again. If not
otherwise controlled, Magdeburg province returns to Prussian
control or, if Prussia no longer exists, Magdeburg goes to the
major power controlling Brandenburg province. The Kingdom of
Westphalia political marker and the previous major power's Free
State flag are removed when the kingdom goes neutral or ceases
to exist and/or is ceded.
11.3.3.2: Rule 10.5.2.2 is modified when applying to the minor
country components in the Kingdom of Westphalia. Instead of
the component minor countries automatically going neutral
during a Minor Country Control Step, they only need to be
checked during a New Political Combinations Step. If in the
Fiasco Zone during a New Political Combinations Step, one die
is rolled for each of the component minor countries. Failure to
roll higher than the economic, loss number means that the
component minor country goes neutral (or changes control-see
10.5.2.3); otherwise there is no effect. NOTE: No die rolls are
made if there is no economic loss number in the Fiasco Zone box
or for Magdeburg province.
11.3.4 CEDING THE KINGDOM OF WESTPHALIA: If the
Kingdom of Westphalia's territories are ceded, either voluntarily
or as a peace condition, they are ceded as separate minor
countries and/or a province. The political marker is never ceded,
only removed if the conditions for the kingdom's existence end-
if the kingdom is gone, then it must be recreated as in 11.3.1 to
exist again.
11.3.5 POLITICAL POINTS: The Kingdom of Westphalia is
worth one political point to, create. Individually gaining or
losing of it gain/cost the usual political points for
conquering/losing parts minor countries/provinces (see 10.2.1.2
and 10.2.2).
[ 11.4 ] THE KINGDOM OF BAVARIA: The King of Bavaria
was an ambitious fellow and Napoleon gave him the Tyrol
province to cement their relations. The Tyrolians detested their
Bavarian overlords and all-in-all this was one of Napoleon's least
successful creations.
11.4.1 CREATING THE KINGDOM OF BAVARIA: The
Kingdom of Bavaria can be created by France or Prussia. The
Kingdom of Bavaria consists of the minor country of Bavaria
and the province of Tyrol. If France or Prussia controls both of
these, then the Kingdom of Bavaria may be declared by the
controlling major power. Control is marked by placing a
controlling major power Free State flag and the "K. of Bavaria"
political marker anywhere in the kingdom.
11.4.2 USING THE KINGDOM OF BAVARIA: Once
created, the Kingdom of Bavaria is generally treated as a normal
minor Free State. The combined money and manpower of its
component parts are doubled (as in any minor Free State-see
8.2.3) in value and used in any desired way for the usual
purposes. The combined money and manpower may be used to
purchase Bavarian army factors. Garrison factors from the
Kingdom of Bavaria may be placed anywhere within Bavaria
and/ or the Tyrol. In addition, if France controls the Kingdom of
Bavaria, the Bavarian corps has a movement allowance of 4. If this
option is used, this corps does not get a 4 movement allowance
simply for being French controlled (see 7.3. 1. 1)-the Kingdom of
Bavaria must be created for their movement allowance to be
increased (NOTE: movement is also increased if the Kingdom of
Bavaria is not created, but Bavaria is incorporated as part of the
Confederation of the Rhine see 11.5.2.1).
11.4.3 CONQUERING THE KINGDOM OF BAVARIA: The
component parts of the Kingdom of Bavaria are treated much the
same (the difference being what Austria does with Tyrol province)
as a multi-district minor country (see.10.4) with the major district
being Bavaria (capital Munich) and the minor district being Tyrol
(capital Salzburg).
11.4.3.1: If the Tyrol is conquered separately by Austria, it
becomes an unceded province of Austria and if conquered by any
other major power that does not control Bavaria, it becomes a
ceded province under their control.
11.4.3.2: If Austria conquers the Kingdom of Bavaria by capturing
Munich. Tyrol is immediately reincorporated into Austria as an
unceded province, and the Kingdom of Bavaria ceases to exist
(remove the political marker) and if this is done by any other major
power, Tyrol becomes a ceded province and Bavaria becomes a
conquered minor country under that major power's control-the
Kingdom of Bavaria ceases to exist.
11.4.3.3: If the Kingdom of Bavaria goes neutral, the Kingdom of
Bavaria political marker remains on the map and is treated as a
multi-district neutral minor country for determining political points
for declaring war (see 4,2.1.2) and assuming control (see 4.6.3.1),
but is conquered as in 11.4.3.2.
11.4.3.4: The Kingdom of Bavaria political marker is removed
whenever Tyrol province is under different control than Bavaria's.
11.4.4 CEDING THE KINGDOM OF BAVARIA: If the
Kingdom of Bavaria's two districts are ceded, either voluntarily or
as a peace condition, they are ceded together as one minor country,
along with the political marker. The controlling major power may
not break up the kingdom to cede individual districts or for other
purposes. EXCEPTION. If ceded to Austria, handle as in 11.4.3.2.
11.4.5 POLITICAL POINTS: The Kingdom of Bavaria is worth
one political point to create and costs one political point to cede.
Individually gaining or losing parts of it gains/costs the usual
political points for conquering/losing minor countries/provinces
(see 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.2-ie., +1 political point to conquer Bavaria,
political point to have Bavaria conquered and no political points to
separately conquer or lose Tyrol province).
[ 11.5 ] * THE CONFEDERATION OF THE RHINE:
Napoleon created the Confederation of the Rhine to further
consolidate his position in Germany. Austria, through their control
of the Holy Roman Empire had previously had the dominant
position in Germany, but this dominance had been slipping for
centuries.
11.5.1 CREATING THE CONFEDERATION OF THE
RHINE: The Confederation of the Rhine can be created only by
Austria, France or Prussia. The Confederation of the Rhine
consists of the minor countries of Hanover and Hesse (which may,
also be part of the Kingdom of Westphalia), Baden, Bavaria,
Saxon and Wurttemburg, all of which have corps the minor
countries Berg, Duchies, Kleves and Mecklenburg, which do not
have corps, and the provinces of Magdeburg (which may also be
part of the Kingdom of Westphalia) and Tyrol (which may also be
part of the Kingdom of Bavaria). If Austria or Prussia creates the
confederation, their own provinces (Tyrol for Austria, Magdeburg
for Prussia), although not actually ceded, are considered to be part
of the Confederation of the Rhine and no longer provide money
and manpower for the home nation. If Austria, France or Prussia
controls at least five of the six minor countries with corps plus any
three other minor countries and/or provinces (all possible minor
countries and/or provinces that the major power controls must be
incorporated), then the Confederation of the Rhine may be
declared by the controlling major power.
11.5.1.1: Control is marked by placing a controlling major power
Free State flag and the "C. of the Rhine" political marker anywhere
in the confederation.
30
11.5.1.2: In order for Austria to create the Confederation of the
Rhine (or, "Holy Roman Empire" in this case), peace condition
C.8 may never have been applied against Austria, or, if it was
applied, it must have been cancelled by Austria applying peace
condition C. 9 to any and all major powers that had previously
applied C.8 against Austria.
11.5.1.3: In order for France or Prussia to create the
Confederation of the Rhine, at least one major power must have
applied peace condition C.8 against Austria land not had this
cancelled by Austria using peace condition C. 9 against them.
NOTE: Historically, the creation of the Confederation of the
Rhine somewhat predated the official end of the Holy Roman
Empire, but the French victories at Ulm and Austerlitz had made
Austria's bowing to Napoleon's demands on this matter
inevitable.
11.5.1.4: Whenever the major power controlling the
Confederation of the Rhine gains control of territory that could
be part of the Confederation of the Rhine, -this territory must be
added to the Confederation of the Rhine during the next, New
Political Combinations Step.
11.5.1.5: The Confederation of the Rhine can never be created
by one major power, even if all other requirements can be met, if
the Confederation of the Rhine political marker is still on the
map with another major power's Free State flag.
11.5.2 USING THE CONFEDERATION OF THE RHINE:
Once created, the Confederation of the Rhine is generally treated
as a normal minor Free State. The money and manpower of its
component parts are doubled in value and used for the usual
purposes. In addition:
11.5.2.1: If France controls the Confederation of the Rhine, the
Baden, Bavaria, Hanover, Hesse, Saxony and Wurttemburg
corps have a movement allowance of 4. If this option is used,
these corps do not get a 4 movement allowance simply for being
French-controlled (see 7.3.1.1)-the Confederation of the Rhine
must be created for their movement allowance to be increased.
EXCEPTIONS: If the Confederation of the Rhine is not created,
some corps may still get a 4 movement allowance if French
controlled if options 11.3.2.1 and 11.4.2 apply.
11.5.2.2: The money from all minor countries and provinces can
be used for any purpose, but manpower from minor countries
and
provinces without corps can be used only to purchase
Hanoverian infantry and cavalry factors.
11.5.2.3: Only infantry of the appropriate minor country can be
used as minor country garrisons within the minor countries with
corps. Only Hanoverian infantry can be used as minor country
garrisons within Hanover and the minor countries and provinces
without corps. NOTE: Hanoverian and Bavarian infantry have
the same morale value and, therefore, any "Hanoverian" infantry
factors placed as garrison in Tyrol province are considered to be
Bavarian infantry if the Kingdom of Bavaria is in existence. If
Hanover and/or Bavaria are NOT part of the Confederation of
the Rhine, their army factors are not available for use by the
Confederation of the Rhine. Gen 23/4
11.5.3 CONQUERING THE CONFEDERATION OF THE
RHINE: The component parts of the Confederation of the Rhine
are still treated as separate minor Free States and ceded
provinces for purposes of conquering it. However, as long as the
Confederation of the Rhine's controlling major power still
controls at least one component minor country with corps, the
Confederation of the Rhine still exists (consisting of whatever
territory remains).
11.5.3.1: If the last component minor country with corps of the
confederation goes neutral, is ceded or is conquered, the
confederation will cease to exist and become separate parts
(either neutral or controlled, as the case may be) again. If not
otherwise controlled and the Kingdom of Westphalia is not also
in existence, Magdeburg province returns to Prussian control or,
if Prussia no longer exists, to the major power controlling
Brandenburg province. If not otherwise controlled and the
Kingdom of Bavaria is not also in existence, Tyrol province
returns to Austrian control or, if Austria no longer exists , to the
major power controlling Austria province. The Confederation of
the Rhine political marker and the previous major power's Free
State flag are removed when the confederation goes neutral or
ceases to exist or and/or is ceded.
11.5.3.2: Rule 10.5.2.2 is modified when applying to the minor
country components in the Confederation of the Rhine. Instead of
the component minor countries automatically going neutral during
a Minor Country Control Step, they only need to be checked
during a New Political Combinations Step. If in the Fiasco Zone
during a New Political Combinations Step, one die is rolled for
each of the component minor countries. Failure to roll higher than
the economic loss number means that the component minor
country goes neutral (or changes control-see 10.5.2.3); otherwise
there is no effect. NOTE: No die rolls are made if there is no
economic loss number in The Fiasco Zone box or for Magdeburg
or Tyrol provinces.
11.5.4 CEDING THE CONFEDERATION OF THE RHINE:
If the Confederation of the Rhine's territories are ceded, either
voluntarily or as a peace condition, they are ceded as separate
minor countries and/or provinces. The political marker is never
ceded, only removed if the conditions for the confederation's
existence end-if the confederation is gone, then it must be
recreated as in 11.4.1 to exist again.
11.5.5 POLITICAL POINTS: The Confederation of the Rhine is
worth two political points to create. Individually gaining or losing
parts of it gain/cost the usual political points for conquering/losing
minor countries/provinces (see 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.2).
[ 11.6 ] * THE OTTOMAN EMPIRE: Definitely weakened, but
not quite yet the "sick man of Europe" it would become later in the
century, the Turks definitely dreamed of regaining control of their
Islamic North African empire (although most of these nations wore
still nominally under Turkish control, the real power was not
there). France, Great Britain and Spain, in a different manner, also
had ambitions in North Africa (they would definitely have called it
by a different name, but "Ottoman Empire" is used for
convenience).
11.6.1 CREATING THE OTTOMAN EMPIRE: The Ottoman
Empire can be created only by France, Great Britain, Spain or
Turkey. The Ottoman Empire consists of the, minor countries of
Algeria, Cyrenica, Egypt, Morocco, Palestine, Syria, Tripolitania
and Tunisia. If France, Great Britain, Spain or Turkey controls any
six of these (all possible minor countries that the major power
controls must be incorporated), then the Ottoman Empire may be
declared by the controlling major power.
11.6.1.1: Control is marked by placing a controlling major power
Free State flag and the "Ottoman Empire" political marker
anywhere in the area.
11.6.1.2: Whenever the major power controlling the Ottoman
Empire gains control of territory that could be part of the empire,
this territory must be added to the Ottoman Empire during the next
New Political Combinations Step.
11.6.1.3: The Ottoman Empire can never be created by one major
power, even if all other requirements can be met, if the Ottoman
Empire political marker is still on the map with another major
power's Free State flag.
11.6.2 USING THE OTTOMAN EMPIRE: Once created, the
Ottoman Empire is generally treated as a normal minor Free State.
The combined money and manpower of its component parts are
doubled (as in any minor Free State-see 8.2.3) in value and used in
any desired way for the usual purposes. The combined money and
manpower may be used to purchase army factors for the corps or
garrisons of any of the component minor countries with corps.
Garrison factors from the Ottoman Empire may be placed
anywhere within its territory. In addition, there are extra
advantages for a Turkish-controlled Ottoman Empire, as follows:
11.6.2.1 IMPROVED OTTOMAN MORALE: If Turkey
controls the Ottoman Empire, the morale value of every Ottoman
Empire corps becomes 2.0 for infantry and 3.0 for cavalry.
11.6.2.2 "TRIBUTE": If Turkey controls the Ottoman Empire, at
the conclusion of all December Money and Manpower
Expenditure Steps, any unspent Ottoman Empire money points are
added as "tribute" to Turkey's remaining money points (see 8.5.7)
instead of being lost as in 8.5.5.
11.6.3 CONQUERING THE OTTOMAN EMPIRE: The
component parts of the Ottoman Empire are still treated as separate
minor Free States for purposes of conquering it. However, as long
31
as the Ottoman Empire's controlling major power still controls at
least one component minor country with corps, the Ottoman
Empire still exists (consisting of whatever territory remains).
11.6.3.1: If the last component minor country with corps of the
empire goes neutral, is ceded or is conquered the empire will
cease to exist and become separate parts (either neutral or
controlled, as the case may be) again. The Ottoman Empire
political marker and the previous major power's Free State flag
are removed when the kingdom goes neutral or ceases to exist
and/or is ceded.
11.6.3.2: Rule 10.5.2.2 is modified when applying to the minor
country components in the Ottoman Empire. Instead of the
component minor countries automatically going neutral during a
Minor Country Control Step, they only need to be checked
during a New Political Combinations Step. If in the Fiasco Zone
during a New Political Combinations Step, one die is rolled for
each of the component minor countries. Failure to roll higher
than the economic loss -number means that the component
minor country goes neutral (or changes control-see 10.5.2.3);
otherwise there is no effect. NOTE: No die rolls are made if
there is no economic loss number in the Fiasco Zone box.
11.6.4 CEDING THE OTTOMAN EMPIRE: If the Ottoman
Empire's territories are ceded, either voluntarily or as a peace
condition, they are ceded as separate minor countries. The
political marker is never ceded, only removed if the control of all
the empire's territories goes to another major power or powers-if
the empire is gone, then it must be recreated as in 11.2.1 to exist
again.
11.6.5 POLITICAL POINTS: The Ottoman Empire is worth
two political points Gen 23/4 to create. Individually gaining or
losing parts of it gain/cost the usual political points for
conquering/losing minor countries (see 10.2.1.2).
[ 11.7 ] * THE KINGDOM OF THE TWO SICILIES: When
this option is used, the minor countries of Naples and Sicily
should be considered to be one multi-district minor country
called the "Kingdom of the Two Sicilies" (it is like this in
campaign games starting in 1805). Naples is the major district
and Sicily is the secondary district, but there are some special
rules that apply if this option is used:
11.7.1: If the two are controlled by different major powers the
Naples corps are controlled by the major power controlling
Naples and the Naples fleet is controlled by the major power
controlling Sicily.
11.7.2: The money and manpower values of Naples and Sicily
are combined and doubled (as in any minor Free State-see 8.2.3)
but, if separate minor Free States controlled by different major
powers the money and manpower values of each are not
doubled.
[ 11.7a ] * CISAPLINE REPUBLIC: There are two obvious
omissions in the starting situation of 1805 Campaign Games.
Prior to 1805 Lombardy and Romagna were united as the
Cisalpine Republic, re-established by the Treaty of Luneville in
1801 and governed (under the presidency of Bonaparte) by the
liberal Italian nobleman Count Melzi. In January 1805 Napoleon
converted the republic into the Kingdom of Italy, to which he
added Venetia after the Treaty of Pressburg. The Treaty of
Luneville also converted the Grand Duchy of Tuscany, which for
most of the 18th c. had been a possession of a junior branch of
the Habsburg dynasty, into the “Kingdom of Etruria”; in return
for Spain’s cession of Louisiana to France, the new kingdom
was transferred to a member of the House of Bourbon-Parma,
who was also the nephew of the Spanish queen and the husband
of a Spanish princess.
11.7a.1 CREATING THE CISAPLINE REPUBLIC: The
Cisalpine Republic, consisting of the primary district of
Lombardy and the secondary district of Romagna, begins 1805
campaign games as a French Free State with eleven infantry and
one cavalry strength points.
11.7a.1.1: If destroyed, the Cisalpine Republic may not be
recreated.
11.7a.2 USING THE CISAPLINE REPUBLIC: Once created,
the Cisapline Republic is generally treated as a normal minor
Free State. The combined money and manpower of its
component parts are doubled (as in any minor Free State-see 8.2.3)
in value and used in any desired way for the usual purposes. The
combined money and manpower may be used to purchase
Lombardian army factors. Garrison factors from the Cisapline
Republic may be placed anywhere within Lombardy and/or
Romagna.
11.7a.3 CONQUERING THE CISAPLINE REPUBLIC: If
Lombardy is every ceded (with or without Romagna), then the
Cisapline Republic is dissolved. Additionally, if the Kingdom of
Italy is created later, the Cisalpine Republic is dissolved.
11.7a.4 CEDING THE CISAPLINE REPUBLIC: If the
Cisapline Republic's territories are ceded, either voluntarily or as a
peace condition, they are ceded as separate minor countries and/or
provinces. The political marker is never ceded, only removed if the
conditions for the republic's existence end. MLB & JJ
[ 11.81 ] * ALTERNATE DOMINANT POWERS: In
EMPIRES IN ARMS, as with the historical events portrayed,
France and Great Britain have obvious and constant qualitative
advantages over the other five major powers and, although anyone
can still win, they are the "dominant" powers in the gate and the
centers of diplomatic activity. For example, if Prussia does very
well early in a campaign game, it is still the rather puny Prussia of
the Napoleonic period in terms of army factor morale, with the
addition of some minor country corps for help. It is certainly not
the dangerous Prussia of Frederick the Great less than 50 years
earlier or the dominant Prussia (the basis of modem Germany) of
50 years later and will have trouble maintaining any early gains.
Every one of the major powers in the game has the capability to
become a dominant European power and, during the previous 200
years or during the next century, every one of them was or would
be a dominant power. This option allows players, as the rulers of
their respective major powers to alter the historical balance.
11.8.1 ACHEIVING OR LOSING DOMINANT POWER
STATUS: In order for Austria, Prussia, Russia, Spain or Turkey to
become a dominant power, they must reach the New Political
Combinations Step of an Economic Phase at peace with all other
major powers and in control of certain territories. In order for
France or Great Britain or any other major power that earlier
achieved dominant power status to lose their dominant power
status, they must reach the New Political Combinations Step of an
Economic Phase at peace with all other major powers and not in
control of the territories necessary to maintain their dominant
power status. A France or Great Britain that earlier lost dominant
power status may regain dominant power status if they reach a
New Political Combinations Step at peace with all other major
powers and in control of the territories needed to avoid the loss of
dominant power status. Any changes in dominant power status
must be announced during a New Political Combinations Step.
11.8.2: AFFECTS ACHEIVING OR LOSING DOMINANT
POWER STATUS:
11.8.2.1 MORALE: If Austria, Prussia, Russia, Spain or Turkey
become dominant powers, the morale value of the dominant
power's regular infantry is increased by +1.0 and, for Spanish and
Turkish regular cavalry, morale is also increased by +1.0 Turkish
dominant power feudal infantry and feudal cavalry have their
morale increased by +0.5. If France or Great Britain loses their
dominant status, the morale of the diminished status major power's
regular infantry is reduced by -1.0.
11.8.2.2 CHANGED NAVAL ADVANTAGES: For Great
Britain, the loss of dominant status also means that their fleets lose
their +1 die roll modifier in naval combats and they must always
take the first sequence in a Naval Phase. If Austria and/or Prussia
become dominant powers their fleets lose their -1 die roll modifier
in naval combats.
11.8.2.3 CHANGED LAND PHASE SEQUENCE: If Austria,
Prussia, Austria, Spain and/or Turkey becomes a dominant power
while France remains a dominant power, France no longer gets to
choose its spot in the sequence but must always take the first
sequence in a Land Phase. If two or more of Austria, Prussia,
Russia, Spain or Turkey become a dominant power while France is
not a dominant power, France must always take the first sequence
in a Land Phase. If only one of Austria, Prussia, Russia, Spain or
Turkey is a dominant power while France is not a dominant power,
France takes that major power's usual position in the sequence
32
while the dominant major power may announce when it will take
its sequence, the same as France usually does.
11.8.2.4 INCOME CHANGES: For Austria, Prussia, Russia,
Spain or Turkey, their total major power income is automatically
increased by 10 money points on the Money and Manpower
Collection Steps of every Economic Phase while a dominant
power. For France or Great Britain, their total major power
income is automatically reduced by 10 money points on the
Money and Manpower Collection Steps of every Economic
Phase while not a dominant power.
11.8.2.5 LEADER IMPROVEMENT: If Austria, Prussia,
Russia, Spain or Turkey become a dominant power, the
controlling player may select one leader and consider that, for
that one leader, there is an increase in strategic, tactical and
tactical maximum rating numbers of +1. EXCEPTION: No
leader's ratings may be considered to be increased to exceed 5-5-
6. Clarification: Leader improvement also increases leaders
seniority rating to a maximum of A (for example C -> B). Single
leader can be promoted only once (in case where major power
achieves dominance more than once). Leader improvement is
not cancelled if major power loses dominant status.
11.8.2.6 PROVINCE CHANGES: At the moment a major
power becomes a dominant power, all ceded provinces of other
major powers that it controls become unceded provinces of the
new dominant power's home nation. Any ceded provinces
acquired later remain ceded provinces.
11.8.3 CONTROLLED TERRITORY REQUIRED TO
GAIN DOMINANT STATUS: The following territories must
be controlled by the given major power in order to achieve
dominant status:
11.8.3.1 AUSTRIA: Must control all home nation provinces
plus any 5 of the following 7 territories: the Bosnia province, the
Confederation of the Rhine (even if reduced after creation-if not
using option 11.5, Austria must control at least five out of
Baden, Bavaria, Hanover, Hesse, Saxony or Wurttemburg,
which count together as one territory), the Kingdom of Italy
(even if reduced after creation-if not using option 11.2, Austria
must control Lombardy, Papacy and Venetia, which count
together as one territory), the Piedmont minor country, the
Serbia province, the Silesia province and the Switzerland minor
country.
11.8.3.2 PRUSSIA: Must control all home nation provinces plus
any 4 of the following 6 territories: the Confederation of the
Rhine (even if reduced after creation-if not using option 11.5,
Prussia must control at least five out of Baden, Bavaria,
Hanover, Hesse, Saxony or Wurttemburg, which count together
as one territory), the Denmark minor country (with or without
Norway), the Lorraine province, the Palatinate minor country,
the Moravia province and Poland (must be created).
11.8.3.3 RUSSIA: Must control all home nation provinces plus
any 6 of the following 7 territories: Armenia province,
Bessarabia province, East Galicia province, Moldavia province,
Poland (must be created), the minor country of Sweden (must
include Finland) and West Galicia.
11.8.3.4 SPAIN: Must control all home nation provinces plus all
5 of the following territories: the minor country of Gibraltar, the
Kingdom of Italy (even if reduced after creation-if not using
option 11.3, Spain must control Lombardy, Papacy and Venetia,
which count together as one territory), the Kingdom of the Two
Sicilies (both Naples and Sicily), the minor country of Morocco
and the minor country of Portugal.
11.8.3.5 TURKEY: Must control all home nation provinces plus
any 5 of the following 6 territories: the Crimea province, the
Georgia province, the Military Border province, the Ottoman
Empire (even if reduced after creation-if not using option 11.6,
Turkey must control at least five out of Algeria, Cyrenica,
Egypt, Morocco, Syria, Tripolitania or Tunisia, which count
together as one territory), the Podolia province and the
Transylvania province.
11.8.4 CONTROLLED TERRITORY LOSSES REQUIRED
TO LOSE DOMINANT STATUS: France and Great Britain
start as dominant powers and, to lose dominant status, must lose
the control of the following territories:
11.8.4.1 FRANCE: Must lose control of any 6 of the following
7 territories: the Flanders minor country, the Holland minor
country, the Lombardy minor country, the Lorraine province, the
Palatinate minor country, the Piedmont minor country and the
Switzerland minor country.
11.8.4.2 GREAT BRITAIN: Must lose control of any 6 of the
following 7 territories: the Gibraltar minor country, the Hanover
minor country (already lost at the start of every campaign game),
the Ireland province, the Malta minor country, the Portugal minor
country (neutral and not controlled by Great Britain in campaign
games starting in 1805), the Scotland province and the Wales
province.
[ 11.9 ] * POLITICAL RESTRICTIONS ON PEACE:
11.9.1 "BALANCE OF POWER" RESTRICTIONS ON
LOSSES: No matter how the major powers' rulers may have
wanted to dominate the local landscape, they were all, to some
extent, committed to leaving at least a "rump" of territory and
authority to their peers. This also guarantees that any player who
starts a game can still be in it when it ends. This can be reflected in
two options, either or both of which can be used in a game:
11.9.1.1 RESTRICTIONS ON TERRITORIAL LOSSES: No
major power with a player may ever have its home nation reduced
by more than a total of three provinces.
11.9.1.2 RESTRICTIONS ON CIVIL DISORDER: No major
power with a player may ever go into civil disorder. Ignore 8.7.1
through 8.7.5 for a major power with a player that meets the civil
disorder requirements (see 8.7) and, instead, require that player to
sue for and accept any type of peace during the next Peace Step
with all major powers with which that major power was at war
when the civil disorder conditions were met. We will use this rule.
12.0 MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS
[ 12.1 ] * REINFORCEMENT OPTIONS:
12.1.1 MILITIA CONVERSION: During a Money and
Manpower Expenditure Step, while at war with no other major
power, a major power's player may remove any militia factors
located in controlled home nation territory from the map and pay
three money points per militia factor to "convert" them to regular
infantry factors. These new regular infantry factors are returned to
the map as reinforcements three months later (ie., the same as
newly-purchased regular infantry factors). YES
12.1.2 SHIP BUILDING LOCATIONS: When ships are
purchased, the exact port or ports where these ships will become
available when completed (ie., where they are being "built") must
be noted and announced (their building is common knowledge).
These ports are the only ones where these ships can become
available as reinforcements.
12.1.2.1: If a port city containing building and/or completed but
unassigned ships is occupied by an enemy, all of these major
power ships are considered to be destroyed.
12.1.2.2: If a minor Free State port city containing building
and/or completed but unassigned ships is occupied by an enemy,
these minor power ships are not necessarily considered to be
destroyed and, if building, construction can continue normally, as
the major power that took the port desires (competitive die rolls
determine the ships' fate if a mixed force occupies the port and
agreement cannot be reached). Control of these ships will
eventually go to the major power that controls both the minor
country fleet counter and the port, so that the ships can be
transferred to the fleet. YES
[ 12.2 ] * NAVAL OPTIONS:
12.2.1 OPTIONAL SEA CROSSING ARROWS:
12.2.1.1 CHANNEL ARROW: Consider that there is a sea
crossing arrow between the Lille area and the area east of
Portsmouth. NO
12.2.1.2 DANISH/SWEDISH SEA CROSSING ARROWS:
These areas are extremely narrow and could be dominated even
by the guns of the period. A fleet in the sea area cannot block any
of the sea crossing arrows in Denmark or the one connecting the
Copenhagen and Malmo areas if enemy corps and/or garrisons are
located in both land areas connected by the arrows. YES
33
11.9.2 GREAT BRITAIN AND FRANCE AT WAR: No
major powers necessarily start at war in the campaign games
(14.4 and 14.7) that start in 1805 to give players the maximum
flexibility in creating their own diplomatic climate. Actually,
France and Great Britain were already at war and the duel
between them was to continue to the bitter end. These optional
rules recreate this competition:
11.9.2.1 START AT WAR: France and Great Britain must start
at war in the campaign games starting in 1805. France and Great
Britain may NEVER make an informal peace and, unless one or
both have ceased to be dominant powers, may never be allies.
Gen 23/4 (Similar in Gen 25/4.)
11.9.2.2 MANDATORY PEACE CONDITIONS: If France
sues Great Britain for peace, Great Britain must demand an
unconditional peace that includes peace condition C.6 to remove
the NAPOLEON leader (unless already killed). Peace cannot be
made if these conditions cannot be met (ie., if another major
power with which France is making peace at the same time does
not agree to the removal of NAPOLEON). If Great Britain sues
France for peace, France must demand an unconditional peace
that includes peace condition C.1.c (which could be chosen by
any major power with which Great Britain is making peace at
the same time) to remove two fleets and peace condition C.5,
which must permit French major power forces access. These
requirements are all dropped in a game using option 11.8 if
either France or Great Britain ceases to be a dominant power
and/or if one of the other major powers becomes a dominant
power.
12.2.2 NAVAL RAIDING: For each sea area adjacent to Great
Britain that contains an enemy fleet(s), British colonial trade is
reduced by 5 money points (maximum reduction to 0). This is
determined during an Economic Phase. Gen 25/4 This applies
only during the Economic Phase. Gen 27/2 YES
12.2.3 MOVING LARGE FLEETS/TRANSPORTS: Larger
fleets or fleets convoying transports are not as mobile as smaller
fleets.
12.2.3.1: These rules apply to fleets in an area that are all
controlled by one major power and/or using combined movement.
They do not apply to fleets in the same area that are controlled by
different major powers that are not using combined movement.
12.2.3.2: Any fleet starting its Naval Phase in a stack where some
or all of the fleets are transporting corps and/or contain a depot
for invasion supply loses -1 movement point off of its movement
allowance for the Naval Phase.
12.2.3.3: Any fleet starting its Naval Phase in a stack loses -1
movement point off of its movement allowance for the Naval
Phase per fleet in the stack in excess of one fleet. For example,
the movement allowance in a stack of two fleets would be
reduced to 6 and, in a stack of three fleets, would be reduced to 5.
12.2.3.4: Rules 12.2.3.2 and 12.2.3.3 are cumulative if both
apply. However, the maximum movement allowance reduction
that ever applies is -3 movement points - a movement allowance
of 4 movement points is the least to which a stack can be reduced.
12.2.3.5: These movement allowance reductions apply only to
normal naval movement-they do not apply for naval retreat and
pursuit movements. NO
12.2.4 REDUCED NAVAL TRANSPORT CAPACITY: If this
option is used, rule 6.2.5 is modified to redefine carrying
capacity. Fleets may carry no more than 10 army factors each,
regardless of how these are organised into corps (the army factors
must still be in corps). If transporting fleets are eliminated, all
excess army factors that they were transporting are also
eliminated these losses may be taken from various corps, if
desired. YES
12.2.5 PROPORTIONAL NAVAL LOSSES: When a stack of
fleets of mixed nationalities (including minor country
nationalities) participates in a combat, the losses it takes should
be as nearly proportional to the starting proportions as possible.
Round .5 and above up. When proportions do not "round out"
precisely, an "odd" loss or losses should be assigned by mutual
agreement or, if agreement cannot be reached, by competitive die
rolls. For example, a stack of fleets totalling 68 ships contains 36
British (52.9%), 20 Swedish (29.4%) and 12 Portuguese (17.7%)
ships and loses 10 ships in a naval combat. The losses should be
5.29 (5) British, 2.94 (3) Swedish and 1.77 (2) Portuguese ships.
YES
[ 12.3 ] LAND OPTIONS:
12.3.1 SUPPLY LIMITS PER DEPOT: Each individual depot
that is a supply source or part of a valid supply chain may only be
used to supply a maximum of four corps and/or besieged
garrisons. YES
12.3.2 BRITISH TRAINING: Great Britain proved quite adept
at turning certain minor country troops into first-class soldiers,
notably the Portuguese and Hanoverian (the "King's German
Legion" or "KGL") troops that they trained. Under this option,
after 24 continuous months as a British-controlled minor Free
State, the morale of the army factors in the Hanover or Portugal
corps is considered to be 4.0 for both infantry and cavalry in those
corps. Garrison infantry factors of these nationalities retain their
usual (2.0) morale. YES
12.3.3 CAVALRY OPTIONS:
12.3.3.1 CAVALRY SUPERIORITY: If a side has at least
twice as many cavalry factors (including cossacks and freikorps)
as the other side at the beginning of any round of a field, limited
field or trivial combat (if necessary, recalculate the number of
cavalry factors present for every combat round), the superior side
gets +1 added to its combat die roll. NOTES: The net maximum
modifier to a combat die roll for all modifiers is +1. Cavalry
factors in an outflanking force are not counted for cavalry
superiority until the outflanking force "arrives" (see 7.5.2.12).
Cavalry factors in an outflanking force that has arrived are not
counted as double factors for purposes of determining cavalry
superiority. This rule does not apply if all factors on both sides
are cavalry. YES
12.3.3.2 CAVALRY WITHDRAWALS: A defending cavalry
corps stacked alone or only with other cavalry corps and/or
cossacks/freikorps has its strategic rating (or that of its
commanding leader) increased by +1 for withdrawal purposes
only (see 7.5.2.5.2.2). This rule does not apply if the attacker is
also an all-cavalry force and/or if the commanding leader has a
strategic rating of 5. Gen 25/4 The Austrian Light Infantry Corps
IS considered to be a cavalry corps for this purpose. Gen 27/2
YES
12.3.4 GUARD COMMITMENT: Before the resolution of a
combat round commences (see 7.5.2.8 for sequencing), a player
with a guard or grenadier corps involved may choose to "commit
the guard" and announces that this is being done. If a force
includes guard or grenadier corps of two or more nationalities,
only one corps may be used for this purpose. A player may do
this only once per day of combat.
12.3.4.1: If both sides have guard and/or grenadier corps, the
decision to commit or not and (if applicable) the number of
morale levels of the shift must be written down by both side's
players at the start of every combat round and revealed
simultaneously.
12.3.4.2: The effect of committing the guard is to increase the
morale level used on the Combat Resolution Table by +1 or +2.
For example, the 3-2 combat table becomes the 3-3 (increased by
+1) or 3-4 (increased by +2) combat table.
12.3.4.3: Only two or more guard factors of French and/or
Russian guards may be used to attempt to increase the morale
level by +2. One or more guard factors of Austrian, French,
Prussian and/or Russian guard factors may be used to increase the
morale level by +1. Despite these minimums, all available guard
factors of a nationality that is committed must be used for this.
Turkish (See 12.10.2), British and/or Spanish guard factors may
not be committed.
12.3.4.4: The player who commits his guard then consults the
GUARD COMMITMENT TABLE on the Game Card and rolls a
die. The die roll is cross-referenced with the column showing the
number of morale levels shifted. The result is the number of
guard factors automatically lost (in addition to any that may be
lost during the coming combat round).
34
12.3.4.5: If at least one guard factor of the committed nationality
is left, then the combat round proceeds, with the modified morale
level. The lost guard factors do not participate in the combat
round. If all committed guard factors were lost, then the
committing side is automatically considered to break without
fighting that combat round (although the opposing side still
fights).
12.3.4.6: If at least one guard factor survives and the combat
round is fought with the modified morale level, the other side
must be broken during that combat round or the side that
committed the guard is automatically considered to be broken.
YES
12.3.5 ARTILLERY CORPS: The French and Russian major
powers each have the use of an artillery corps. These have special
uses during field and limited field combats, trivial combats and
limited field combats. These special uses do not apply during
siege assaults or defender attacks (unless a relieving force is
available for a limited field combat).
12.3.5.1: In every combat round (see 7.5.2.8 for sequencing) the
artillery may be used to "bombard" before normal combat is
resolved, the casualties inflicted by bombardment taking no part
in later combat. If both sides possess artillery, the bombardment
losses are considered to be determined simultaneously.
12.3.5.2: The losses removed by bombardment may not be
militia, where possible, if the side taking the bombardment losses
already has a morale loss of 2.0 or greater.
12.3.5.3: Artillery bombardment inflicts only casualties-it has no
effect on morale (ignore morale losses when doing an artillery
bombardment).
12.3.5.4: Artillery always bombards using the 5-5 table,
irrespective of the tables being used for the normal combat round.
Artillery bombardment is unaffected by any terrain other than
marsh-there can be no bombardment in marsh terrain, although
the artillery factors still participate in normal combat.
12.3.5.5: Artillery also takes part during the normal combat round
(ie., when used for bombardment it effectively gets to fight
twice).
12.3.5.6: If at any time during a combat round a side (or the
pinning force of a side) consists of only artillery factors, that side
is automatically considered to break. YES
12.3.6 PROPORTIONAL LAND LOSSES: When army factors
of mixed nationality (including minor country nationalities)
participate in a combat, the losses suffered should be as nearly
proportional to the starting proportions as possible. Round .5 and
above up. When proportions do not "round out" precisely, an
"odd" loss or losses should be assigned by mutual agreement or, if
agreement cannot be reached, by competitive die rolls. Once the
number of army factors lost by each contingent are determined,
the controlling players decide the types of factors to be lost by
each contingent (within the normal limits for militia, cavalry,
guard, etc. factors that must be lost by the whole army) by mutual
agreement or, if impossible, by competitive die rolls. YES
12.3.7 ARMY LEADER OPTIONS:
12.3.7.1 CORPS LEADERS: For purposes of combats (although
without a leader counter corps must still attempt to withdraw or
reinforce individually), when no leader is available for a multi-
corps force and the best corps rating is used, treat these best corps
ratings the same as if the force were commanded by a leader with
those strategic and tactical ratings and a tactical maximum rating
of 1 and modify accordingly (see 10.6.1.2.1). YES
12.3.7.2 FURTHER TACTICAL RATING REDUCTIONS:
This option extends rule 10.6.1.2.1 by allowing a commander
with three times the corps of the tactical maximum rating to have
the tactical rating reduced by -3, with four times the corps to be
reduced by -4, etc. The tactical rating can still never be reduced to
below zero. YES
12.3.7.3 NAPOLEON'S RATINGS: Napoleon's military skill
slipped noticeably as he got older. If this option is used, the
NAPOLEON leader's tactical rating is reduced to 4 starting in
January, 1809 and the strategic rating reduced to 4 starting in
January, 1812. These reductions do not apply for combats fought
within the original French home nation boundaries. YES
12.3.8 DETACHING/ABSORBING MINOR FREE STATE
FACTORS: If players wish to allow Free State factors to be
detached as garrisons outside of the Free State's borders, they may
do so, but the players must keep side notes on the nationalities of
garrisons, mark nationalities on grey garrison/strength counters
placed outside of a Free State's borders or make their own
garrison/strength counters for the various possible minor Free
States. YES
12.3.9 NO CEDING: Allow the ceding of minor countries only
as a peace term and at no other times. Gen 23/4 NO
12.3.10: OVERWHELMING NUMBERS: Field or limited
field combats where one side has a 5:1 or better ratio in strength
factors MUST be resolved using trivial combat. EXCEPTION:
An outnumbered DEFENDER may attempt to withdraw before
the trivial combat by rolling the commander's strategic rating or
less. Gen 25/4 YES
[ 12.4 ] * PEACE TREATY LIMITED ACCESS: This option
supersedes the force repatriation rules in 4.4.6.2 and forces are
not repatriated when peace is made. Instead, when peace is made,
the former enemies have a period of automatic "limited access" to
get their forces out of the former enemy power's territory.
12.4.1 GARRISONS: By the end of three Land Phases after
peace is made, all garrison factors must be out of the other major
power's cities. In the case of a victor that chose peace condition
C.5, the requirement is reduced to getting garrisons out of the
capital cities during this period.
12.4.2 CORPS, FLEETS AND DEPOTS: By the end of six
Land Phases after peace is made, all corps, fleets, depots and
depot garrison factors must be out of the other major power's
territory. This requirement can be ignored by a victor that chose
peace condition C.5.
12.4.3 FAILURE TO LEAVE: Any forces that have not met the
requirements in 12.4.1 and 12.4.2 in the required times must be
demobilised and/or scuttled during the next Reinforcement Phase
(NOTE: rule 5.1.4.2 limitations on scuttling may be ignored to
meet this requirement) unless the major power controlling the
territory grants voluntary access (see 10. 3). NO
[ 12.5 ] * ECONOMIC MANIPULATION: Economic
manipulation simulates the ability of a major power to control its
economy to gain the additional political points, money or
manpower that are needed. Economic manipulation takes place
during the Manipulation Step of an Economic Phase (see 8.4).
Performing economic manipulation consists of first recording
changes from the last economic manipulation setting and then
resetting the ECONOMIC MANIPULATION DISPLAY on side
one of each major power's National Card (even if side two is used
for everything else, this display on side one should be used with
this option during a campaign game) for the next economic
manipulation. The setting is always in the 0 square at the start of a
campaign and 8.4. 1 restrictions can limit the ability to use other
settings.
12.5.1 RECORDING ECONOMIC MANIPULATION: Major
Powers gain or lose the number of political points specified by the
large Political Status Adjustment ("PSA") number in the square of
its ECONOMIC MANIPULATION DISPLAY in which that
major power's economic manipulation marker is positioned. This
square also specifies gains or losses in money and/or manpower.
Record any political point changes on the POLITICAL STATUS
DISPLAY on the Status Card and add or subtract the money and
manpower from the totals determined during the Money and
Manpower Collection Step.
12.5.2 SETTING ECONOMIC MANIPULATION: The
owning player then sets the economic manipulation marker's
position to any square on the ECONOMIC MANIPULATION
DISPLAY. This position specifies the PSA number and amount
of money and/or manpower to be gained or lost in the next
Economic Phase's Manipulation Step. YES
[ 12.6 ] BLANK FORMS: Copies of the blank forms found on
side two of the Minor Countries National Card and the back of
the Status Card can be filled out and used to provide a written
record of when and what happened. Copies of these forms, when
cut apart and filled in, not only provide reference during a game
but, if used faithfully, they provide a good record of the major
events in a game. Some samples are filled in below.
[ 12.7 ] LEADER CASUALTIES: After the completion of a
field or limited field combat, a trivial combat, or a naval combat,
each side with a leader or leaders present checks to see if any
became casualties in the combat by rolling two dice. Rolling a 12
35
indicates a leader casualty. If a casualty is indicated, randomly
choose a leader counter from among those present (if more than
one is present) and roll one die for the chosen leader. If a 6 is
rolled, the leader casualty is "killed" and taken permanently from
the game. On any other roll, the leader casualty is "wounded" and
taken from the map for a number of complete months equal to the
die roll number. YES
12.7.1 KEY LEADER SURVIVAL: Each player will choose
one “key leader”, who cannot be killed. If that “key leader” rolls a
12 then a 6, during the above process in rule 12.7, instead of
killing the “key leader” change the result to a 12 month injury.
12.7.1.1 CHOOSING THE “KEY LEADER”: At the start of
the game, each player will choose one leader who cannot be
killed. For some countries, their key best leader enters as a
reinforcement, ie. Blucher or Wellington. If the leader enters as a
reinforcement, the player may instead choose another leader (if he
possesses one) from the start until the time that the leader arrives.
When the chosen leader arrives as a reinforcement, the secondary
choice returns to being a normal leader. Similarly, if using the
optional rule that removes Kutusov, and Kutusov is chosen as the
Key leader, Russia may choose another leader as the “Key
Leader” when Kutusov is removed. YES
[ 12.8 ] * ALLIED VOLUNTARY ACCESS: Amend the rules
in 10.3.1.2.2 to state that voluntary access may be granted only to
an ally. NO
[ 12.9 ] * AMERICAN TRADE OPTION: The War of 1812
between Great Britain and the United States was to some extent
"engineered" by Napoleon and his "continental system." In this
option, if peace condition B.6 is applied to stop as major power's
American trade, this counts as a major power denied trade with
America for the die roll required in 8.2.1.2.2.2.2 and the British
must make the die roll during any Money and Manpower
Collection Step in which any major powers are denied American
trade by Britain and/or by the B.6 peace condition. YES
All rules denoted by an asterisk are ignored for play of the
scenarios. The scenarios are suitable for play by two players.
[ 12.10 ] TURKISH VARIANTS
12.10.1 THE GRAND VIZIER: The Grand Vizier is simply the
Sultan's chief advisor and commander-in-chief of the army. As
such, he is "Immortal." If the Grand Vizier is the victim of a
leader casualty, a die roll of 6 does not eliminate the counter
permanently. Treat the result as a six month wound instead. The
Sultan will simply appoint a new Grand Vizier at that time. Gen
29/5 YES
12.10.2 THE SULTAN’S GUARD: Each Janissary Corps hold
one factor of guard infantry in place of a regular infantry strength
point. This is a substitution, one guard replacing one of the
infantry. The Corps capacity thus becomes 14 Inf, 1 Guard in
1805. Historically, picked warriors from the 60th through 63rd
Ortas, known as the Solaks, constituted the Sultan's finest troops.
Turkey does not begin any scenario or campaign game with a
guard factor. They must be built during the course of the game.
Turkish guards cannot be used per rule 12.3.4 Guard
Commitment. The Nizami-Cedid cannot have any guards
attached. Gen 29/5 & JJ YES
12.10.3 INCREASED CALVALRY CAPACITY: Based purely
on numbers, the Turkish regular cavalry is under-represented in
the game. If using this option, each Janissary Corps can hold 2
Cav in addition to the infantry. If used along with the Sultan's
Guard, each Janissary corps has a capacity of 1 Guard, 14
Infantry, and 2 Cavalry in 1805, and 1 Guard, 11 Infantry, and 2
Cavalry in 1792. The capacity of the Nizami-Cedid, is increased
to 12 Inf, 4 Cav in 1805, and 8 Inf, 3 Cav in 1792. Gen 29/5 & JJ
YES
12.10.4 THE NIZAMI-CEDID: Allow the use of the Nizami-
Cedid Corps in the 1812 and 1813 scenarios/campaign games, but
restrict its usage to within the Turkish home nation and controlled
minors (only) and consider it to have a capacity of 8 Inf, and 2
Cav. The rules are too harsh by not allowing its use. It was
restored by Selim's brother in 1808 but did not reach its former
glory until after the Napoleonic Era, when it was used to crush the
Janissaries in 1826. Gen 29/5 This rule goes into effect in May
1807. From this point on it has the restriction to only move with
within Turkish home nation and controlled minors. If outside of
required locations in May 1807, it is automatically disbanded. JJ
YES
12.10.5 OTTOMAN CAVALRY SUPERIORITY: Ottoman
cavalry is doubled for the purposes of determining cavalry
superiority only. FIN NO
[ 12.11 ] NORTH AFRICAN VARIANTS
12.11.1. NON-EUROPEAN TROOPS: The manpower values of
conquered minor countries listed in (11.6.1 The Ottoman Empire)
are halved if owned by any major power other than Turkey.**
MLB & FIN
**Exception: Egypt produces full MP.
**Exception: Spain gets full MP for Morocco and Algiers.
**Exception: Any Free State produces full manpower. FIN YES
12.11.2 MAMLUK & SPAHI CAVLARY: Cavalry raised by
Syria, Egypt, Cyrenaica, Tripolitania, Tunisia, Algeria &
Morocco cost $9, rather than $15 each. MLB NO
[ 12.12 ] EGYPT VARIANTS
12.12.1 EGYPTIAN LEADER OPTION: Create a leader
counter to represent the "Napoleon of Cairo," MUHAMMAD
ALI. ALI is available during the 1805 scenario if Turkey controls
Egypt as a Minor Free State. He is available in any army
reinforcement step. He is used in the same manner as the
Bernadotte leader counter in the standard game. See 10.6.5. The
13.0 SCENARIOS
[ 13.1 ] SCENARIO FORMAT: The following abbreviations
have been used. A = artillery factor or artillery corps designator.
C = regular cavalry factor or cavalry corps designator. Ck =
cossack counter. Fk = freikorps counter. Gd = guard factor or
guard or grenadier corps designator. Gr = guerrilla factor. I =
regular infantry factor. Lt = light infantry corps designator, and M
= militia factor. Where the type of corps is not specified it is an
infantry corps. Where the nationality of the corps or army factor
is not specified it is that of the major power's home nation.
Information is given in the following format.
13.1.1 FORCES SETUP: Only the forces involved on the
portion of the map in use are given in the scenarios. The opposing
forces are setup in the areas specified in the individual scenarios.
which will also specify setup order.
13.1.1.1: When a force (including reinforcements) is setup in a
province. minor country or area(s) containing a city(s) or
depot(s). the army factors or corps may be set up in any
unoccupied city(s) (in their corps and/or as garrisons) or depot(s)
of that province. minor country and/or area(s). as the controlling
player desires
13.1.1.2: The corps counters given for initial setup or as
reinforcements are the maximum number available. Only the
minor country corps mentioned for setup/reinforcement are used
in the scenarios Players may organize their army factors in their
corps counters to require less corps counters, if desired and
possible. Corps strengths should be recorded on the National
Cards and any factors not assigned to corps (except Cossacks,
freikorps and guerrillas, which have their own counters) should
be available as factors of garrison/strength counters.
13.1.2 STARTING MONEY: Each major power is allocated a
starting amount of money points.
13.1.3 CONTROL: Control of minor countries and ceded
provinces always remains with the major power controlling them
at the start and their forces are not removed from the map if their
minor country is conquered (unless exceptions are mentioned in
the special rules. For the scenarios, the differentiation of control
into a minor Free State or conquered minor country is used for
reinforcement and historical purposes only. Only those territories
needed for a scenario are mentioned-any territories not mentioned
are "out of play" for the scenario.
36
MUHAMMAD ALI leader counter is rated 3-2-2-C. Gen 29/5
Once Turkey conquers Egypt any time after December 1804, the
Egyptian leader, MUHAMMAD ALI is brought into play. ALI
counts as a Turkish/Egyptian leader. However, if Egypt is
conquered by another power and then made a Free State, ALI will
be considered an Egyptian minor leader (similar to the
French/Swedish leader BERNADOTTE). YES
12.12.2 EGYPTIAN FLEET: Egypt has a fleet capable of
holding up to 15 ships. Egyptian ships’ morale is 2.5 if advanced
naval rules are being used. Otherwise, the Egyptian fleet gets a -1
modifier in combat.
12.12.2.1: Add 8 ships to at start Egyptian OoB in 1805. MU
YES
[ 12.11 ] RUSSIAN VARIANT
12.11.1 RUSSIAN SCORCHED EARTH: Russia can declare
any one home or ceded province to be “scorched” per economic
phase, after the Money and Manpower Collection Step. This costs
1 PP and may not be attempted unless Russia is at war with a MP.
The provincial capital must be in Russian control and unbesieged.
There must also be at least one unbesieged Russian corps
anywhere in the province.
12.11.1.1 A scorched province has the forage values of every area
reduced by 1 for 12 months. The money value of the province is
halved (FRD) for the duration of the same time period. MU YES
13.1.4 REINFORCEMENTS: The available reinforcements in
army factors, corps counters, leaders and money are detailed as to
what arrives, arrival time and arrival location. They must be taken
at the listed time and location-if not taken then and there, the
reinforcements are lost. Reinforcements are received only if
eligible (see 5.2) and, for corps, cossacks and freikorps, only if a
counter is available for use.
13.1.5 TIME: The Turns that the game starts and ends are given.
Setup the Turn markers in the appropriate boxes of the TIME
DISPLAY on the Status Card.
13.1.6 SPECIAL RULES: Any special rules (if any) that apply
to the scenario are explained. Special rules that apply to all
scenarios are.
13.1.6.1: Forces may not enter any area outside of the territories
specified as under the control of the major powers in the scenario
being played.
13.1.6.2: A combat loss is any loss incurred during combat
including sieges and surrenders (this excludes foraging losses,
besieged foraging losses and reinforcements that are lost (see
13.1.4).
13.1.6.3: Since there is no Lending Money Step in scenarios, the
major powers may not lend money to each other unless a special
rule says otherwise.
13.1.6.4: If option 12.3.5 is not used, treat all artillery factors as if
they are regular infantry factors and allow the artillery corps to
hold the same number of regular infantry/militia factors as they
could normally hold artillery factors.
13.1.6.5: All of a major power's corps and depots are available for
use, unless otherwise stated.
13.1.7 VICTORY: This tells how to determine a scenario
winner.
[ 13.2 ] THE 1805 (INTRODUCTORY) SCENARIO: This
scenario allows players to master the basic military systems of
EMPIRES IN ARMS before embarking on the later scenarios and
the full military, diplomatic and economic systems of the
campaign games. The 1805 scenario simulates Napoleon's
victorious Austerlitz campaign.
13.2.1 FORCES SETUP:
13.2.1.1 ALLIED FORCES: The Allied forces are setup first.
13.2.1.1.1 Austrian Forces:
A. 3 corps and 1C corps with 23I, 7C and the MACK leader in
the Ulm area.
B. I corps with 10I, 1C and the JOHN leader in the Salzburg area.
C. 5 corps, 1C corps and 1Gd corps and the CHARLES leader
with 3Gd, 32I and 11C in and/or within 1 area of the Venice area.
D. 1I in Prague.
E. 4I in Vienna.
F. 3 depots anywhere in Austrian-controlled territory.
13.2.1.1.2 Russian Forces:
A. 2 corps and 1C corps with 16I and 3C. 1Ck and the
KUTUSOV leader in the Krakow area.
B. 1Gd corps, 2 corps and 1C corps with 5Gd, 11I, 4C and the
ALEXANDER leader in the Brest-Litovsk area.
C. 2 corps with 9I and 1M, 1Ck and the BENNIGSEN leader in
the Grodno area.
D. 1 depot each in the Brest-Litovsk and Lublin areas.
13.2.1.2 FRENCH FORCES: The French forces are setup
second.
A. 1 corps with 7I with the BERNADOTTE leader in the Cologne
area.
B. 3 corps with 38I and 3C with the DAVOUT and SOULT
leaders in the Mainz area.
C. 2 corps, 2C corps and lGd corps with 3Gd, 19I and 10C with
the NAPOLEON, NEY and MURAT leaders in the Strasbourg
area.
D. The Bavaria corps with 10 Bavarian I and 1 Bavarian C in the
5 -forage area of the Duchies.
E. 2 corps with 21I and 4C with the MASSENA leader in the
Milan area.
F. I corps with 9I in the Florence area.
G. 3I in Stuttgart.
H. 1 depot each in the Strasbourg, Mainz and Stuttgart areas.
13.2.2 STARTING MONEY: Austria starts the game with $5,
Russia starts with $3, and France starts with $10
13.2.3 CONTROL:
AUSTRIAN controlled territory consists of the Austrian home
nation and Venetia as a conquered minor country
RUSSIAN controlled territory consists of the Russian home
nation
FRENCH controlled territory consists of the French home nation
plus Flanders, Kleves, Palatinate, Duchies, Baden, Wurttemburg,
Berg, Hanover, Switzerland, Piedmont, Lombardy, Tuscany and
Romagna as conquered minor countries and Bavaria and Holland
as minor Free States
13.2.4 REINFORCEMENTS:
13.2.4.1 AUSTRIAN: 6 money points every Turn. Also 3I in
Vienna, 1I in Ofen and 1I in Prague every Turn. No new corps
counters are available.
13.2.4.2 RUSSIAN: 2 money points per Turn. No other
reinforcements or new corps counters are available.
13.2.4.3 FRENCH: 5 money points per Turn. 1 corps with 5I and
1M in the Strasbourg area in November--no other new corps
counters are available.
13.2.5 TIME: The game begins in September, 1805 and ends in
December, 1805.
13.2.6 SPECIAL RULES: There are no new special rules with
this scenario.
13.2.7 VICTORY: The French player wins if he controls the city
of Vienna at the end of the game. Otherwise, the Allied player
wins.
[ 13.3 ] THE 1809 SCENARIO: This scenario simulates the
campaign on the Danube--Napoleon's last major triumph.
13.3.1 FORCES SETUP:
13.3.1.1 FRENCH FORCES: The French forces are setup first.
A. 1 corps with 12I. 5M, 1C in the area between the Ulm and
Munich areas.
37
B. 1 corps with 8I and 3C and the Wurttemburg corps with 5
Wurttemburg I and 1 Wurttemburg C and the NAPOLEON and
MASSENA leaders in the Nuremburg area.
C. 1 corps and 1C corps with 23I and 7C and the Bavaria corps
with 11 Bavarian I and 1 Bavarian C and the DAVOUT leader in
the 3-forage area immediately north of the Munich area.
D. 1Gd corps with 9Gd and 2C in the Strasbourg area.
E. The Saxony corps with 7 Saxon I and 1 Saxon C and the
BERNADOTTE leader in the northernmost 4-forage area in
Bavaria.
F. The Poland corps with 4 Polish I and 2 Polish C in the Warsaw
area.
G. 1 corps and 1A corps with 6I and 5A in the Zara area .
H. 1 corps with 12I and 3C and 1 Lombardy corps with 8
Lombard I and 1 Lombard C and the EUGENE leader in the
Venice area.
I. 2 Polish I in any Polish city (Poland = Posen and Masovia
provinces).
J. 2M in Ulm.
K. 1 depot each in the Venice, Stuttgart, Strasbourg and Warsaw
areas.
13.3.1.2 AUSTRIAN FORCES: The Austrian forces are setup
second.
A. 2 corps with 24I, 2M. 2C in any Bohemia province area or
areas.
B. 4 corps and 2Gd corps with 48I. 10Gd, 7M and 8C, 1Fk and
the CHARLES leader in the Linz area.
C. 1 corps with 9I, 1C in any East Galicia province area or areas.
D. 1Lt corps with 4I in the Karlstadt area.
E. 2 corps with 20I and 2C and I Insurrection corps with 15M and
3C and the JOHN leader in the Trieste area.
F. 4M in Vienna.
G. 1 depot each in the Vienna, Prague, Krakow and Trieste areas
plus 3 other depots in any 3 other areas in Austrian controlled
provinces.
13.3.2 STARTING MONEY: Austria starts the game with $20
and France starts with no money
13.3.3 CONTROL:
FRENCH controlled territory consists of the French home nation
plus Illyria, Magdeburg and Tyrol as ceded provinces. Baden,
Berg, Duchies, Flanders, Kleves, Hesse, Holland, Hanover,
Venetia, Switzerland, Palatinate, Papacy, Romagna, Tuscany and
Piedmont as conquered minor countries and Bavaria,
Wurttemburg, Saxony, Lombardy and Poland (Posen and
Masovia) as minor Free States
AUSTRIAN controlled territory consists of the Austrian home
nation less Illyria and Tyrol province.
13.3.4 REINFORCEMENTS:
13.3.4.1 FRENCH: 5 money points per Turn. Other
reinforcements are as follows:
A. In May, the French corps that started with EUGENE receives
13M and/or they may be placed as garrisons in Venetia and/or
Lombardy
B. In May, any one eligible French corps may receive 3M.
C. On each Turn after April, place 2 Polish I in Warsaw if it is
still controlled by French forces.
D. France may receive 1 new French corps counter of any type
per Turn except on the April turn.
13.3.4.2 AUSTRIAN: 3 money points per Turn. Other
reinforcements are as follows.
A. The second Insurrection corps is available at full strength
(15M, 3C) when activated (see 10.4) and the Tyrol corps with 8I
is also available for placement (see 10.1.5).
B. On each Turn after April, 2M are placed in Vienna, Prague and
Ofen, if the city is currently Austrian-controlled.
C. On each Turn after April, add 1C to any eligible corps
D. Austria may receive 1 new corps counter of any type per Turn
except in the April Turn.
13.3.5 TIME: The game begins in April, 1809 and ends in July,
1809.
There is no French April sequence (start the game with the
Austrian sequence of the April Land Phase).
13.3.6 SPECIAL RULES:
A. All French leaders' strategic ratings (but not those of the corps'
intrinsic rating) are reduced by one in addition to any other
alterations, for the April Turn only.
B. When the French A corps first enters Vienna, it adds 5 artillery
factors to its strength.
C. When an Austrian corps is in Poland at the beginning of any
Reinforcement Phase it will either lose one army factor or
increase the Polish corps by two Polish infantry factors, at the
Austrian player's choice.
D. The number of French national corps on the map at any time
cannot exceed the guard corps, the artillery corps, 4 cavalry corps
and 6 corps. The French have only 5 depots available for this
scenario.
13.3.7 VICTORY:
A. The Austrian player wins immediately if NAPOLEON is killed
or captured.
B. The Austrian player wins if, at the end of the scenario he has
suffered less combat losses than the French player and the French
player has suffered at least 20 combat losses.
C. The French player wins if, at the end of the scenario. the
Austrian player has suffered at least 30 combat losses and at least
20 more than the French player.
D. Any other result is a draw.
[ 13.4 ] THE 1812 SCENARIO: The ultimate clash of arms in
Napoleonic times is recreated in this scenario, wherein both
players must skillfully combine caution with aggression across
the sweeping plains of Russia.
13.4.1 FORCES SETUP:
13.4.1.1 RUSSIAN FORCES: The Russian forces are setup first.
A. 5 corps, 1Gd corps, 3C corps and 1A corps with 10Gd, 46I,
10C and 10A, 2Ck and the BARCLAY and WITTGENSTEIN
leaders in or within one area of the Kovno area.
B. 2 corps and 1C corps with 22I and 4C, 1Ck and the
BAGRATION leader in or within one area of the Brest-Litovsk
area.
C. 2 corps and 1C corps with 18I and 4C and the TORMASSOV
leader in the 4-forage area in Polesia province.
D. 2 corps with 16I and 2C in the any Moldavia province area.
E. 10I in Sveaborg
F. 15I shared in any manner between Riga and Vitebsk.
G. 25I distributed to any of the other cities within the Russian
major power (maximum of 5 per provincial capital or 2 per any
other city)
H. 6 depots are placed within the Russian major power.
13.4.1.2 FRENCH FORCES: The French forces are setup
second.
A. 1 Prussian corps with 10 Prussian I,4 Prussian M and 1
Prussian C in the Konigsberg area.
B. 4 corps, 1Gd corps, 2C corps and 1A corps with 53I, 15M,
20Gd, 19C and 12A and the NAPOLEON, DAVOUT, MURAT,
and NEY leaders in an area or areas in or within 2 areas of the
Thorn area but not adjacent to the Russian border.
C. The Venetia corps with 8 Venetian I. The Lombardy corps
with 13 Lombard I. the Bavaria corps with 12 Bavarian I and 1C
corps with 5C and the EUGENE leader in the Thorn area
D. The Poland corps and the Poland C corps with 16 Polish I and
6 Polish C. the Saxony corps with 7 Saxon I and 1 Saxon C and
the Hanover corps with 8 Hanoverian I and 1 Hanoverian C and
the JEROME leader in an area or areas in or within one area of
the Warsaw area but not adjacent to the Russian border
E. 1 Austrian corps with 15 Austrian I and 1 Austrian C in the
Lemberg area.
F. 6M in Konigsberg and 5 Polish I in Warsaw.
G. 1 depot each in the Thorn, Konigsberg, Warsaw and Lemberg
areas.
38
13.4.2 STARTING MONEY: Russia starts the game with $10
and France starts with $25
13.4.3 CONTROL:
RUSSIAN controlled territory consists of the Russian home
nation and Bessarabia as a ceded province and Finland as a
conquered minor country
FRENCH controlled territory consists of Poland as a minor Free
State (consisting of Masovia. West Galicia and Posen)
13.4.4 REINFORCEMENTS:
13.4.4.1 RUSSIAN: 7 money points per Turn. Other
reinforcements are as follows.
A. In July, 15M are placed in Moscow. 10M are placed in
Smolensk. and 8I are placed in Kiev. The ALEXANDER leader
must be placed with any corps at this time
B. In September, the KUTUSOV leader is placed with any corps.
C. Beginning in August, Russia receives IM per Turn in each
unbesieged Russian-controlled provincial capital of a province
containing an enemy corps and an additional IM each in St.
Petersburg, Moscow and Kiev.
D. 1Ck is placed in any Russian-controlled cossack (C) province
per Turn, up to the counter-mix limit (6 maximum).
E. Russia may place any number of new corps counters of any
type in areas with existing Russian corps each turn.
13.4.4.2 FRENCH: 7 money points per Turn. Other
reinforcements are as follows
A. In August remove the JEROME leader.
B. In September, 1 corps with 51 and 11M is placed in Warsaw
C. In November, 2 corps with 5I and 20M are placed in Warsaw
13.4.5 TIME: This game begins in June. 1812 and ends in
February, 1813, unless ended earlier by victory conditions.
13.4.6 SPECIAL RULES:
A. Only the Eastern map is used.
B. The Alexander leader may never be taken off the map (as per
10.6.2) once placed
C. The French can use Lemberg as a supply source
D. The Russian corps that starts in Moldavia may only move to an
area in Russia before being able to move elsewhere.
E. Both sides may enter and garrison the provinces of East
Galicia and East Prussia
F. The Prussian and Austrian corps will "go home" (are removed,
along with all remaining army factors of their nationality, even if
detached) whenever their losses equal or exceed 50 percent of
their starting strength.
G. The number of French national corps on the map at any one
time cannot exceed the guard corps, the artillery corps, 4 cavalry
corps and 6 corps. The French have only 5 depots available for
this scenario
13.4.7 VICTORY:
A. The French player wins immediately if (I) the ALEXANDER
leader is killed or captured or (2) if at any time after August,
Russian losses (including forage losses but not reinforcements
that are not placed) are three times those of the French and total at
least 50 factors, or (3) if the French have at some time occupied
Moscow, St Petersburg and Kiev.
B. The Russian player wins immediately if the NAPOLEON
leader is killed or captured, or, if at any time, a Russian factor
occupies the cities of Konigsberg and Warsaw
C. The Russian player wins at the end of the game unless the
French have at some time occupied any two of-St. Petersburg,
Moscow, Kiev.
D. Any other result is a draw.
[ 13.5 ] THE 1813-1814 DER BEFREIUNGSKRIEG
SCENARIO: Following the disaster in Russia, the Central
European powers foresaw the possibility of liberation. While
talking peace the German powers prepared for war.
13.5.1 FORCES SETUP:
13.5.1.1 ALLIED FORCES: The Allied forces are setup first
13.5.1.1.1 Russian Forces:
A. 1Gd corps, 1 corps, 1C corps and 1A corps with 3Gd, 6I, 5C
and 6A and the ALEXANDER and TORMASSOV leaders in the
Dresden area.
B. 2 corps and 1 C corps with 8I and 3C and the
WITTGENSTEIN leader in the Leipzig area
C. 1 corps and 1C corps with 5I and 3C in the Wittenberg area
D. 1 corps with 7I and 1C and the BARCLAY leader in the Thorn
area (a portion of this area shows on the western map but the
name is on the eastern map).
E. 1 corps with 3I in the Mecklenburg area F. 1 corps with 4I
besieging Glogau
G. 1 corps with 8I besieging Danzig.
H. I corps with 4I besieging Stettin
I. 1 corps with 4I besieging Kustrin
J. 2I in Hamburg.
K. 3Ck in any area(s) containing any Allied corps.
L. 2 Swedish corps with 12 Swedish I and 3 Swedish C and the
BERNADOTTE leader besieging Stettin.
M. Up to 4 Russian depots in Prussian and/or Saxon areas.
13.5.1.1.2 Prussian Forces:
A. 1Gd corps and 1 corps with 1Gd. 6I, 2M and 2C and the
BLUCHER leader in the Dresden area.
B. 2 corps with 5I, 1M and 1C and the YORCK leader in the
Leipzig area.
C. 1 corps with 3I, IM and 1C in the Wittenberg area.
D. 5I and 5M and 1 Fk in Berlin.
E. Up to 3 Prussian depots anywhere in Prussia and/or Saxony.
13.5.1.2 FRENCH FORCES: The French forces are setup
second
A. 2 corps and 1C corps plus garrisons with 221, 5M and 3C and
the EUGENE leader in the Magdeburg area
B. 1 corps with 7I and 8M and the NEY leader in the
northernmost area of Baden
C. 2 corps and 1Gd corps plus garrisons with 8I, 15M, 2Gd and
2C and the NAPOLEON and SOULT leaders in the Mainz area.
D. 1 corps and 1C corps with 8I, 2M and 6C and the DAVOUT
leader in Hanover adjacent to the Hamburg area
E. 1 corps with 9M in the Strasbourg area
F. The Bavaria corps with 13 Bavarian I and 2 Bavarian C in the
Nuremburg area.
G. 151 besieged in Danzig.
H. 3I besieged in Glogau.
I. 1I besieged in Stettin.
J. 1I besieged in Kustrin.
K. 3I in Erfurt.
L. 5 Danish I in Copenhagen.
M. 1 depot each in the Magdeburg, Mainz and Strasbourg areas.
13.5.2 STARTING MONEY: Russia starts the game with $6,
Prussia starts with $3 and France starts with $4. Austria, when it
enters, starts with $6.
13.5.3 CONTROL:
RUSSIAN controlled territory consists of Sweden (and Finland)
as a minor Free State. Also, since no part of the Russian home
nation is on the western map, the Russians may use (when
controlled) the Breslau, Posen, Stettin and/or Danzig areas as
supply sources.
PRUSSIAN controlled territory consists of the Prussian home
nation less Magdeburg province plus Mecklenburg as a
conquered minor country
AUSTRIAN controlled territory consists of the Austrian home
nation less Tyrol and Illyria provinces. Saxony is covered by the
Special Rules.
FRENCH controlled territory consists of the French home nation
plus Magdeburg and Tyrol as ceded provinces, Kleves, Duchies,
Holland, Flanders, Palatinate, and Berg as conquered minors
countries and Bavaria, Baden, Denmark, Wurttemburg, Hanover
and Hesse as minor Free States.
13.5.4 REINFORCEMENTS:
13.5.4.1 RUSSIAN: 2 money points every Turn. Other
reinforcements are as follows.
39
A. In September, 3 corps and 1C corps with 191, 7M and 2C and
the BENNIGSEN leader in the Danzig area.
B. Any number of available corps counters on any and/or every
Turn
C. Beginning in May, 1813,3I, 1C, 1A and 1Ck (maximum 3 on
the map at one time) are available at any eligible location(s) every
Turn.
13.5.4.2 PRUSSIAN: 1 money point every Turn. Other
reinforcements are as follows.
A. Any number of available corps counters on any and/or every
Turn
B. Beginning in May. 1813, 1M is available at any eligible
location every Turn.
C. During the June, September, December and March Turns, 1Fk
(if available) in the Berlin area.
13.5.4.3 AUSTRIANS: 3 money points every Turn, after they
enter the war. Other reinforcements are as follows:
A. Any number of available corps counters on any and/or every
turn after the Austrian entry .
B. Beginning with Austrian entry, 1I and IC are available at any
eligible location(s) every Turn.
C. During the June, September, December and March Turns, IFk
(if available) in the Vienna area
13.5.4.4 FRENCH: 2 money points every Turn. Other
reinforcements are as follows.
A. In August, the MURAT leader is placed with any C corps.
B. In September, the Gd corps receives 5Gd.
C. In September, place one corps with 5M in the Erfurt area.
D. On every Turn after Apri11813, the French player receives 3M
which can be placed in any eligible corps. He also places 1M in
Paris (one die roll's worth if the NAPOLEON leader is there)
E. On every second Turn (May, July, September, etc.), 1C can be
added to any eligible corps.
F. Up to 1 new corps counter of any type per Turn
G. In June, remove the SOULT leader.
13.5.5 TIME: The game begins in April, 1813 and ends in April,
1814.
13.5.6 SPECIAL RULES:
A. Only the Western Map is used
B. Until Austria has entered the war, no units may enter or retreat
into Austrian-controlled territory
C. The Bavarian corps may not move until attacked or until
Austria has entered the war
D. Both players may enter Saxony. When the French first occupy
Dresden, the French player receives control of the full strength
Saxon corps (81 and 2C) in that area. Thereafter, for as long as it
lasts, the Saxon corps and/or any detached army factors are
controlled by the player controlling Dresden-it is not removed
when the control of the Saxon Free State changes
E. (OPTIONAL)The Swedish corps may only move in an Allied
Land Movement Step if the Allied player rolls a I, 2, or 3 with
one die.
F. ARMISTICE: Either player may ask for an armistice at the
beginning of any Turn after May, 1813. If the other player agrees
to it, then an "armistice" will occur for that arid the following
month. If the French side has broken in any combat in which
NAPOLEON commanded then the French player may not refuse
an Allied request for an armistice. The Allied player may not
refuse a French request for an armistice prior to (but excluding)
September, 1813, if an unbesieged French factor currently
occupies Berlin. Each player may make any number of armistice
requests but there may only ever be one armistice. An armistice
request may not be made in 1814. Units may only be moved such
that they end their movement closer (in areas) towards Paris (if
French) or Berlin (if Allied) than the area from which they started
movement during the two months of an armistice. Furthermore,
combat is not allowed during an armistice (therefore units may
not move such that an attack is required under 7.3.7. Sieges may
continue but siege assaults or defender attacks may not be
attempted. Special reinforcements are placed at the beginning of
the armistice.
(1) The allies add 4 Prussian I, 1 Prussian Gd, 5 Prussian C and
30 Prussian M and as many corps as are necessary to
accommodate them, in or with any existing Prussian corps. Add
25 Russian I, 3 Russian Gd, 10 Russian C, and 10 Russian M, and
as many Russian corps as are necessary to accommodate them, in
or with any existing Russian corps. Remove the
WITTGENSTEIN leader . Bring the Russian A corps up to full
strength. Austria is now in the war on the allied side. For the
Austrians, place 2Gd corps, 1Lt corps, 3 corps and 1C corps with
8Gd, 18I, 6M and 11C and the SCHWARZENBERG leader in
any area or areas of Bohemia province. Place 2 corps with 121,
IM, and 2C anywhere in Austria outside of Bohemia province.
The Austrian Fk is placed in Vienna. Place 4 Austrian depots
anywhere in Austrian territory. The Tyrol corps, at a full strength
of 8I is available for placement (see 10.1.5), as are the two
insurrection corps (see 10.1.4) at full strength.
(2) The French add 7Gd, 5I, 15M, and 10C to any appropriate
corps. The French player also receives 10 money. Place the
French A corps with 8A in any area containing a French corps.
Place the Polish corps with 3 Polish I and 1 Polish C in any area
containing a French corps.
G. When an Allied force loses a battle on the edge of the map it
must be retreated onto an adjacent friendly depot or, if this is not
possible, off the map. A force retreated off the map may not
return.
H. The number of French national corps on the map at anyone
time cannot exceed the guard corps, the artillery corps, 4 cavalry
corps and 6 corps. The French have only 5 of their depots
available for the scenario.
13.5.7 VICTORY:
A. The Allied player wins immediately if NAPOLEON is killed
or captured.
B. If either player asks for an armistice and the other player
agrees to it, the French player will win the scenario unless, at
some time the Allies player has a factor in Paris in which case the
Allied player wins immediately.
C. If neither player asks for armistice or one asks but the other
player does not agreed to it, the Allied player will win the
scenario at the end of April, 1814 unless there are at that time no
unbesieged Allied (non-cossack or freikorps) factors on the map
in which case the French player wins.
[ 13.6] THE PENINSULAR WAR SCENARIO (1808-1814):
Fresh from his victories in Central Europe, and with Tilsit leaving
most of Europe under his control, Napoleon decided it was time
to solve the problems in Spain. Who then could have foreseen the
next six grisly years?
13.6.1 FORCES SETUP:
13.6.1.1 ALLIED FORCES: The Allied forces are setup first.
13.6.1.1.1 Spanish Forces:
A. 1 corps with 121, 4M and 2C and the BLAKE leader in the
Corunna area.
B. 1 corps with 3I and the DE LA CUESTA leader in the Leon
area (area containing the city only).
C. 1 corps with 5I, 3M and 2C in any area adjacent to the
Barcelona area (excluding the Gerona area)
D. 1 corps with 4I and 2M in the Cuidad Real area.
E. 2 corps with 1Gd, 9I, 3M and 4C and the CASTANOS leader
in the Seville area.
F. 1 corps with 4I, 4M and 1C in the Valencia area (area
containing the city only)
G. 5M in Saragossa
H. 2 depots anywhere in Spain.
13.6.1.1.2 British Forces: 31 and I depot in Gibraltar.
13.6.1.2 FRENCH FORCES: The French forces are setup
second.
A. 1 corps with 7I, 4M and 2C and the MURAT leader in the
Madrid area.
B. 1 corps with 5I, 2M and 1C in the Burgos area.
C. 1 corps with 3I besieging Saragossa.
D. 1 corps with 6M in the Barcelona area
E. 1 corps with 3I and 1M in any area adjacent to the Valencia
(city) area.
40
F. 1 corps with 5I and 5M in the clear area between the Seville
and Cuidad Real areas.
G. 1 corps with 9I. 2M and 2C in the Lisbon area.
H. 1 corps with 17I. 6M and 2C in the Bayonne area.
I. 1M in San Sebastian
J. 4I in Perpignan.
K. 3 depots anywhere in France or with a corps or garrison in
Spain.
13.6.2 STARTING MONEY: Spain starts the game with no
money. Britain starts with $10 and France starts with $8
13.6.3 CONTROL:
SPANISH controlled territory consists of the Spanish home
nation.
BRITISH controlled territory consists of Portugal as a minor
Free State and Gibraltar as a conquered minor country .
FRENCH controlled territory consists of the French home nation
13.6.4 REINFORCEMENTS:
13.6.4.1 SPAIN: 1 money point every Turn. Other
reinforcements are as follows.
A. August. 1808. 1 corps with 8I is placed in any coastal area of
Spain or Portugal. but may not be moved during that Turn's Land
Movement Step.
B. Starting in July, 1808 1I and 2M per Turn may be placed in
anyone unbesieged Spanish-controlled city or eligible corps.
C. 1C every 3 months (Jan., Apr., July, Oct.) is placed with any
eligible Spanish corps.
D. Up to 1 new corps counter of any type per Turn
13.6.4.2 BRITAIN: 7 money points every Turn. Other
reinforcements are as follows:
A. August, 1808. 1 corps with 6I and the WELLINGTON leader
are placed (see Special Rule B. for placement).
B. August, 1808. 1 Portuguese corps with 2I in any area in
Portugal.
C. September, 1808, withdraw the WELLINGTON leader
D. September, 1808, 1 corps and 1C corps with 13I and 2C and
the MOORE leader are placed (see Special Rule B. for
placement).
E. May, 1809, the WELLINGTON leader is placed with any
unbesieged corps.
F. From October, 1808 on, 1C every 6 months (Oct., Apr.) and 1
Portuguese C every 6 months. (Jan. , July) with any eligible
corps.
G. From January, 1811, 1I per Turn.
H. Up to 1 new British or Portuguese corps counter of any type
per Turn.
13.6.4.3 FRENCH REINFORCEMENTS: 5 money points
every Turn Other reinforcements are as follows:
A. July, 1808, withdraw the MURAT leader.
B. October, 1808, 3 corps and 1Gd Corps with 6Gd, 42I, 9M and
10C and the NAPOLEON and NEY leaders placed in the
Bayonne and/or Perpignan areas A bonus of $10 is also available.
C. November, 1808, 2 corps with 10I, 2M and 6C and the
SOULT leader placed in the Bayonne and/or Perpignan areas. A
bonus of $5 is also available.
D. January, 1809, withdraw the NAPOLEON leader, even if
besieged.
E. February, 1809, withdraw the Gd corps with all Gd and 2C
(the cavalry may come from elsewhere if not in the Gd corps).
This corps is removed from the game and is no longer available
as a reinforcement). For each Gd factor less than 5 available for
withdrawal, the French player must remove 21 or 4M from any
unbesieged garrison or corps.
F. March, 1809, withdraw 3I from any unbesieged garrison or
corps.
G. January, 1810, the MASSENA leader is placed with any
unbesieged corps A bonus of $5 is also available.
H. April, 1810, 2 corps with 20I, 8M, 2C placed in the Bayonne
area.
I. April, 1811, withdraw the NEY leader, even if besieged, and
10I from any unbesieged garrison or corps.
K. February, 1813, withdraw the SOULT leader, even if
besieged, and 8I and 2C from any unbesieged garrison or corps.
L. July, 1814, the SOULT leader is placed with any unbesieged
corps. A bonus of $5 is also available.
M. From August, 1808 to December. 1811, 21 and 2M per Turn
and 1C every 3 months in any eligible corps (Jan., Apr., Jul, Oct.)
N. From January, 1812, 1I and 2M per Turn and IC every 6
months in any eligible corps (Jan., Jul.).
O. Up to I new corps counter per Turn, as long as it is not the
same Turn as a particular corps counter is removed.
13.6.5 TIME: The game begins in June, 1808 and ends in April,
1814 unless ended sooner due to either player achieving a
decisive victory. There is no French June, 1808 sequence (start
the game with the Allied sequence of the June, 1808 Land Phase.
13.6.6 SPECIAL RULES:
A. COUNTER LIMITS: The maximum corps counter limits are
follows.
Spain may have up to all of its corps but no more than 2 depots.
Great Britain may have no more than 2 corps, the C corps and
the Portuguese corps.
France may use only the Gd corps (from October, 1808 to
February , 1909 only) and regular infantry corps (no artillery or
cavalry corps) in this scenario. There may not be more than a total
of 10 corps from June, 1808 through March. 1809 and from
August. 1809 through March, 1812. From April, 1809 through
July, 1809 and from April, 1812 to the end of the game the limit
is no more than 6 corps. Army factors in any corps that are
removed are eliminated. All French depots are available from
June, 1808 through March, 1809 and from August, 1809 through
March, 1812. No more than 3 French depots may be on the map
during all other Turns (remove any excess during a Depot
Creation/Removal Step of an appropriate Turn)
B. ALLIED NAVAL ALLOCATION: To represent Allied naval
strength, each Turn the Allied player may move one corps from
any coastal area of Gibraltar, Spain or Portugal to any other
coastal area of Gibraltar, Spain, or Portugal. This consumes all of
the corps' movement allowance. British reinforcements A. and D.
are the naval allocation for the August and September 1808 Turns
14.0 CAMPAIGN GAMES
The campaign games are suitable for play by up to seven players.
[ 14.1 ] CAMPAIGN GAME FORMAT: Rules 14.2 and 14.3
should be used to determine who controls each major power. The
game is then setup using the information in this section, in 2.0
and in the individual campaign games. The following
abbreviations have been used A = artillery factor or artillery corps
designator, C = regular cavalry factor or cavalry corps designator,
Ck = cossack counter, Fk = freikorps counter, Gd = guard factor
or guard or grenadier corps designator, Gr = guerrilla factor, I =
regular infantry factor and M = militia factor. Where the type of
corps is not specified, it is an infantry corps. Where the
nationality of the corps or army factor is not specified, it is that of
the major power's home nation.
14.1.1 STATUS CARD SETUP:
14.1.1.1 POLITICAL STATUS: This gives the starting
locations for the major power's political status markers on the
POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY (see 2.4.3.3)
14.1.1.2 TIME: This gives the games starting and ending Turns.
Place the Turn markers in the appropriate boxes of the TIME
DISPLAY to show the campaign's starting date.
14.1.1.3 STARTING VICTORY POINTS: This gives each
major power's total victory points at the start of a game. Record
on the VICTORY POINT DISPLAY. These may be reduced by
the victory point bids used in 14.2 and/or 143 How to win a
campaign game are explained in 8.1.32.
14.1.2 PLAYERS: If there are less than seven players, this shows
what major powers the players will control in the campaign.
41
(even though D has 2 corps, in this case both can be placed during
one Turn)
C. SUPPLY SOURCES:
French: Bayonne, Toulouse, Perpignan only.
Spanish: Any friendly controlled city in Spain.
British and Portuguese: Any friendly controlled city in Portugal
or friendly controlled port city in Spain or Gibraltar Allied forces
in a port are in supply if the British player spends $1 for each
such corps or besieged garrison plus $1 extra for each such city.
This payment is a form of regular supply which is available in
port cities and their areas. Such forces may not have been force
marched
D. Required army factors for withdrawals are withdrawn from
any unbesieged corps or garrison. If no army factors of the correct
type are available to withdraw, the French player does not have to
withdraw them
E. Guerrillas are used (see 10.1.1).
F. The British may freely give money points to the Spanish every
Turn, if desired
G. Option 12.3.2 may, if used, be applied to Portuguese forces
two years after the British gain control of Lisbon.
13.6.7 VICTORY:
A. The French player wins a decisive victory if at any time he
controls every city in Spain and Portugal (this excludes Gibraltar
and Palma).
B. The Allied player wins a decisive victory at any time he
controls every city in Spain and Portugal as well as Gibraltar,
Toulouse, Bayonne and Perpignan.
C. If no player wins a decisive victory then the French player
wins a marginal victory if he controls 5 or more cities in Spain or
Portugal at the end of the game while also controlling Toulouse,
Bayonne and Perpignan.
D. The Allied player wins a marginal victory if the French player
controls less than 2 cities in Spain or Portugal.
E. Any other result is a draw.
14.1.3 EXISTING WARS AND TREATIES: This tells what
major powers are already at war and any existing alliances and
peace conditions when the campaign game begins.
14.1.4 FORCES SETUP: The opposing forces and any setup
restrictions are listed for every major power and for their
controlled minor Free States A major power need not use all of
the available corps, fleets and depots when first setting up (unless
required to get all the factors on the map), but must use all army
factors and ships given. Any depots not listed for initial
placement are still available for use, but must be paid for when
placed (see 7.2), as usual. However, any corps or fleet counters
not initially placed cannot be placed during the next three months,
until they are paid for (see 8.5.4) during a later Economic Phase.
14.1.4.1 ARMY SETUP: Major power's army factors (including
those of their controlled minor Free States) are setup in the
following order: Russia, Turkey, Austria, Prussia, Great
Britain, Spain, France.
14.1.4.1.1: For all major powers. the initial army factors should
be distributed among the corps, whose strengths should be
recorded on the National Cards (copies of side two recommended
for campaign games). Army factors (except cossacks, freikorps
and guerrillas, which have their own counters) not assigned to
corps should be available as an appropriate number of factors of
garrison/strength counters for placement in city and/or depot
garrisons.
14.1.4.1.2: All of a major power's forces (including those of
controlled minor Free States) may be placed as desired
(conforming to the rules) in any land areas within the borders of
their home nation and/or controlled minor countries except where
placement is specified.
14.1.4.1.3: Major powers also place as many of their initial
depots within their home nation and/or controlled minor countries
as allowed by the campaign, so long as all are placed as supply
sources and/or as part of valid supply chains
14.1.4.1.4: When a force is setup in a province, minor country or
area(s) containing a city(s) or depot(s), garrisons, corps, cossack,
freikorps or guerrilla counters may be set up in any unoccupied
city(s) or depot(s) of that province, minor country or area(s), as
the controlling player desires.
14.1.4.1.5: Available Austrian insurrection and Turkish feudal
corps not placed on the mapboard during initial setup are
considered to be standing down. Gen 23/4
14.1.4.2 NAVY SETUP: Next, major powers set up their fleets
and assigned ships (including those of their minor Free States) in
the following order: Russia. Turkey, France, Spain, Great
Britain. The initial ships should be distributed among the initial
fleets, whose strengths should be recorded on the appropriate
National Cards (side two recommended for campaign games)
Unless stated otherwise, fleets must start in, or in a sea area
adjacent to, any port in the home nation and/or controlled minor
countries or may start fleets on blockade of any port(s) of another
major power with which it is at war
14.1.4.3 MONEY AND MANPOWER: Starting money and
manpower points should be noted and modified as used.
14.1.4.4 NATIONAL CARD SETUP: The National Cards are
setup as covered in 2.4.2. The use of copies of side two of these
cards is recommended for campaign games
14.1.5 CONTROL: The provinces and minor countries
controlled by and the form of control or political organization
(see options 11.1-11.7) for minor countries is given for the start of
the campaign game.
14.1.6 REINFORCEMENTS: Unusual reinforcements are given
14.1.7 SPECIAL RULES: Any special rules (if any) that apply
to the campaign game are explained
[ 14.2 ] THE SELECTION OF MAJOR POWERS: Players
should utilize the following method of selecting who controls
each major power that is to be controlled by a player.
14.2.1 SELECTION PROCEDURE (2-7 PLAYERS): Each
player secretly notes a bid for each major power specifying the
number of victory points he is willing to concede to play each
particular major power. A different value must be bid for each
major power. A bid may not be zero, a fraction or a negative
number, but must be a positive whole number
14.2.1.1: Next, all bids are simultaneously revealed and compared
in the following order: Great Britain, France, Russia, Austria,
Prussia, Spain, Turkey (skip any major powers that will not have
a player).
14.2.1.2: For each major power the player who has bid the
highest value gains control of that major power. All other bids for
other major powers by this player and all other bids for that major
power no longer count as the sequence moves on to other major
powers. If two or more bids are equally the highest, the decision
is made by unmodified competitive die rolls, between the players
who made those equal bids. This process continues until all
players have been allotted a major power. Players subtract the
number of victory points they bid for their major power, before
the game starts, from their victory levels on the VICTORY
POINTS DISPLAY on the Status Card (see 1411.3)-this may
result in negative victory point totals
14.2.2 CONTROL OF MULTIPLE MAJOR POWERS (4-6
PLAYERS): Follow the procedure outlined in 14.1 to select
additional major powers. Once all players have selected one
major power, they are all eligible to gain control of one of the still
unselected major powers, by repeating the procedure in 14.2.1 for
the remaining major powers.
14.2.2.1: One player may not control more than 2 major powers
and the player in control of France may not make a bid for control
of Great Britain For example, four players decide to play the
1812-1815 Campaign game. They follow the procedure in 14.2.1
42
and players have been selected to control France, Great Britain,
Russia and Austria. Each player has one major power and they
are all eligible to gain control of one more from among Prussia,
Turkey, or Spain. The procedure in 14.2.1 is followed only for the
three remaining major powers and the Great Britain player gains
Spain, the Russian player gains Prussia and the French player
gains control of Turkey (all at the cost of additional victory
points).
14.2.2.2: If a player controls two major powers, he only wins if
both of his major powers reach their victory levels (see 8.1.3.2.3).
14.2.2.3: Two major powers controlled by the same player may
never go to war with one another
[ 14.3 ] UNCONTROLLED MAJOR POWERS (UMPS) (2-6
PLAYERS): This rule is an alternative to or can be used in
addition to using 14.2.2 and allows major powers (each controlled
by a player) to temporarily control other major powers that have
no player. Rule 14.2.1 is followed to select one major power per
player If desired, for games with only two or three players, 14.2.2
could then be followed to select one additional major power per
player The selected major powers are called "controlled major
powers" and any unselected major powers are called
"uncontrolled major powers" ("UMPS") Some campaign games,
in their "Players" section have a list of UMPs that are already
controlled by other major powers at the start of a scenario,
14.3.1 GAINING CONTROL OF UMPS: During the UMP
Control Step of the December Economic Phase of each year, the
players use of the following procedure to determine the control of
all UMPs. 14.3.1.1 UMP BIDS: Each player secretly writes down
a bid between 0 and 5 for each UMP. A major power at war with
an UMP who has forces inside the UMP's controlled territory or
which just declared war on the UMP that same month (see
14.3.2.4.1) may not bid for control of that UMP. Also, any player
who does not care to gain control of an UMP may decline to bid.
Each bid must be a whole number and (unlike 14.2.1) can be the
same for more than one UMP. Also, a player can gain control of
any number of UMPS, not just one. Totaling these bid numbers
gives the number of victory points that player subtracts from his
highest controlled major power's victory points total (see 14113)
A player at war with an UMP must bid 0 victory points for that
UMP For example, four players decide to play the 1805
Campaign game after selecting major powers as per 14.2.1 , they
bid for the 3 UMPs (Turkey, Prussia, and Spain) The British
player bids 1 for Turkey, 5 for Prussia and 5 for Spain,
subtracting a total of 11 victory points from his total victory
points
14.3.1.2 UMP CONTROL DIE ROLL MODIFIERS: After
simultaneously revealing their bids, each player rolls two dice for
each UMP Modifying this dice roll are the following
14.3.1.2.1: Add the number of victory points bid for that UMP
14.3.1.2.2: Add +1 if allied to that UMP
14.3.1.2.3: Subtract -2 if at war with that UMP
14.3.1.2.4: Add or subtract the value of Status Modifier of the
bidding major power on the POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY on
the Status Card (see 10.5.3)
14.3.1.2.5: Add or subtract the "natural alliance modifier" value
found by crossgridding the controlled major power with the UMP
on the NATURAL ALLIANCE TABLE on the Game Card
14.3.1.3 UMP CONTROL DETERMINATION: After control of
UMPs have been decided, play is commenced for the year.
Whoever rolled the highest modified number gains control of that
UMP for the rest of the year and gains +2 political points, in one
of three ways
14.3.1.3.1 Active UMPs: The UMP is "active" if the highest
player rolled a modified 10 or higher Active UMPs which were
neutral prior to this procedure should be immediately put through
a Combined Economic Phase (see 14.3.2.4.6)
14.3.1.3.2 Inactive UMPs: If the UMP is currently at war with
any other major power and the highest player's modified dice roll
was less than 10, the UMP is "inactive." Inactive UMPS which
were neutral prior to this procedure should be immediately put
through a Combined Economic Phase (see 14.3.2.4.6).
14.3.1.3.3 Neutral UMPs: If an UMP does not meet the
conditions to be active or inactive, the UMP becomes "neutral" If,
during the year, a neutral UMP is declared war upon, it becomes
an inactive UMP for the controlling major power. If no player
currently controls an UMP upon which war has been declared or
which is already at war, players may immediately (during the
Declarations of War Step) bid for control of the UMP (regardless
of the modified roll, a player who gains control in this case has an
inactive UMP). If no players wish to bid the UMP must sue for
peace in the next Peace Step and accept an unconditional peace
with all enemies
14.3.2 RULES FOR USING UMPS:
14.3.2.1 RULES FOR ALL UMPS: A major power who gains
control of an UMP with which it is at war must immediately
come to an informal peace with that UMP with no conditions or
terms 14.3.2.1.1: A major power may not declare war upon its
controlled UMPs nor may they declare war upon it. Declarations
of war between major powers and UMPs are handled normally
UMPs may call to allies (see 4.3) at the option of the controlling
major power (EXCEPTION see 14.3.2.2.2 and 14.3.2.3.3)
14.3.2.1.2: No UMP may ever give or lend money or cede
territory to another major power except as a result of a formal
(conditional or unconditional terms) peace settlement.
14.3.2.1.3: UMPs are not represented on the POUTICAL
STATUS DISPLAY All political points gained or lost by an
UMP are instead gained or lost by the controlling major power. A
major power may not lose or gain more than 3 political points per
battle (unless commanded by NAPOLEON or NELSON-see
6.3.4.2 and 7.5.2.10.1.3) For example, if an UMP and its
controlling major power both had say, 4 corps in a battle they
lost, the controlling major power would not lose two sets of 2, but
only 3 total political points
14.3.2.1.4: Controlled UMPs may attempt to control minor
neutrals (see 4.7) and use the status modifier of the controlling
major power (see 10.5.3)
14.3.2.1.5: A controlled major power that allies with an UMP it
controls gains only 1 political point (not one for each major
power involved)
14.3.2.1.6: Controlled UMPs gain have an economy and gain
reinforcements in the same manner as controlled major powers
(see 8.0) UMPs may not use the economic manipulation option
(see 12.5). An UMP in a mixed force with other major powers
may not take combat losses in excess of their percentage of that
force (see options 12.2.5 and 12.3.6).
14.3.2.1.7: When an UMP is setup, its forces and those of its
controlled minor countries are placed as per the campaign rules
setup (see 14.1.4)
14.3.2.1.8: The 5.1.4 minor country restrictions on scuttling also
apply to UMP fleets. UMP army factors may not be demobilized
voluntarily--they may be demobilized only if forced to do so by
the rules
14.3.2.2 RULES FOR ACTIVE UMPS: An active UMP may
declare war upon any major power (except its controlling one)
When an UMP declares war, the controlling major power loses
political points but, if they both declare war on the same major
power, in the same phase, only one set of political points (the
highest, if different) is lost. An active UMP's forces may be used
freely within the following restrictions
14.3.2.2.1: A record should be kept of the number of land factors
(excluding Turkish feudal factors, cossacks, freikorps or Austrian
insurrection corps factors) lost due to foraging, besieged supply,
surrender, scuttling, demobilization and/or combat. As soon as
factors equal to double the UMP's original national manpower
value are lost, the active UMP reverts to inactive UMP status
immediately. Each ship of an UMP that is lost, counts as three
land factors when determining whether the UMP reverts to
inactive status For example, Spain's original National Manpower
value is 16 (printed on the map), therefore as soon as Spain has
lost 9 ships and 5 land factors (for a total of 32 equivalent land
factors) it reverts to an inactive UMP
14.3.2.2.2: If an active UMP allies to its controlling major power
and is declared war upon, it must call on its controlling major
power as an ally (see 4.3), if possible. The controlling major
power has the choice of breaking the alliance or declaring war on
the aggressor
43
14.3.2.3 RULES FOR INACTIVE UMPS: A major power at
war with an inactive UMP may force an informal peace in the
Peace Step of any Turn that major power has no forces in the
UMP's territory.
14.3.2.3.1: An inactive UMP may not declare war upon any major
power or neutral minor country and may not attack or besiege a
major power's forces outside of the UMP's controlled territory
This means that land forces of an inactive UMP may not end its
Land Movement Step so that such an attack would be required
under rule 7.3.7. This DOES preclude movement into Austrian
border areas where Insurrection corps could be placed if both
Insurrection corps are not already on the map. Gen 27/2 There are
no restrictions on the usage of an inactive UMP's fleets.
14.3.2.3.2: If at any time, an inactive UMP is not at war with any
major power, it reverts to neutral UMP status.
14.3.2.3.3: Like active UMPs, an inactive UMP must call to its
controlling major power (if allied and possible--see 4.3 and
14.3.2.2.2) if the UMP is declared war upon. The controlling
major power has the choice of breaking the alliance or declaring
war on the aggressor
14.3.2.4 RULES FOR NEUTRAL UMPS: Neutral UMPs are by
definition at peace with all major powers and mayor may not be
controlled by a player.
14.3.2.4.1: If a neutral UMP without a controlling player is
declared war upon, the procedure outlined in 14.3.1.3.3 is
followed to determine the controlling major power (if any) for the
remainder of the year. However the UMP can only be gained in
inactive status and a player who just declared war on this UMP
this Turn may not roll for control
14.3.2.4.2: UMPs which revert to neutrality immediately have
their forces removed from the map at their current strength and a
record kept of their remaining money (and with Prussia,
manpower also). If later they revert to active or inactive status,
the forces are placed at their current strength anywhere in the
UMP's territory by the controlling major power
14.3.2.4.3: Neutral UMPs do not follow the Economic Phase
procedure (8.0) and may not attempt to gain control of minor
neutrals (see 4.6).
14.3.2.4.4: If an active or inactive UMP gained control of minor
countries as in 4.6.1 (but was not at war with the aggressor) and
subsequently reverts to neutrality before the minor country is
conquered or there is a lapse in the war, then control of the minor
country reverts to the UMP's last controlling major power.
14.3.2.4.5: Previously controlled UMPs that have reverted to
neutrality still receive reinforcements due to it from a previous
Economic Phase and are added to corps or fleets off-map by the
last controlling player
14.3.2.4.6: A record is kept of the Turn in which an UMP reverts
to neutrality. Immediately, when a neutral UMP becomes active
or inactive, the controlling major power performs a "Combined
Economic Phase" by counting the number of Economic Phases
that the UMP has been neutral and multiplying this figure by the
money and manpower values of its controlled provinces and
conquered minor countries (see 8.2.1.1 and 8.2.2). This value is
then halved (fractions rounded down) and is immediately spent on
the purchase of land forces and corps (see 8.5.3 and 8.5.4). Minor
Free State forces of the UMP are included in this procedure (their
money and manpower values being doubled then halved equals
their basic values) These forces are immediately added to the
current strength of the UMP and the entire force deployed inside
the UMP's territory .
[ 14.4 ] THE 1805-1807 CAMPAIGN GAME: This campaign
game simulates the early half of the Napoleonic wars which saw
Napoleon achieve his greatest successes before the debacles in
Spain and Russia The players begin with the French in a position
to carry out the proposed invasion of England or the actual
conquests of Austria and Prussia and the triumph over the
Russians at Friedland.
14.4.1 STATUS CARD SETUP:
14.4.1.1 POLITICAL STATUS: Use the (I) positions.
14.4.1.2 TIME: The game begins in January, 1805 and ends after
the December, 1807 Turn.
14.4.1.3 STARTING VICTORY POINTS: All major powers
begin with 0 victory points.
14.4.2 PLAYERS: If there are less than 7 players the following
division of major powers is recommended.
6 PLAYERS: Great Britain, France, Russia, Austria, Turkey,
Prussia
5 PLAYERS: Great Britain, France, Russia, Austria, Turkey
4 PLAYERS: Great Britain, France. Russia, Austria.
3 PLAYERS: Great Britain, France, Russia.
2 PLAYERS: Great Britain, France Use rules 14.2 and/or 14.3 to
gain control of all initially unselected major powers
14.4.3 EXISTING WARS AND TREATIES: Before any forces
are setup, major powers may announce pre-existing states of war.
This allows major powers in effect, to declare war before the
game begins No political points are lost for doing so Players may
wish to apply option 11.9.2. Pre-existing states of war may be
announced only between major powers. Neutral minor countries
may not be involved. No alliances are in effect and no peace
conditions apply
14.4.4 FORCES SETUP: The major power's forces begin with
these strengths.
AUSTRIA: 75I, 7Gd, 15C, 7 depots, any desired corps and $33
Both insurrection corps begin at full strength but may not be setup
on the map The freikorps is not used in this scenario. The Tyrol
corps will be used only under the conditions of 10.1.5. All leaders
except SCHWARZENBERG are available at the start of the game
FRANCE: 135I, 5Gd, 17C, any desired corps and fleets, 4
depots, 49 ships and $45 All leaders except EUGENE and
JEROME are available at the start of the game The French player
also sets up Holland (the Holland corps with 4 Dutch I and 1
Dutch C and the Holland fleet with 15 Dutch ships--the Holland
fleet must start at Amsterdam)
GREAT BRITAIN: 1Gd, 19I, 4C, 2 depots, 100 ships, any
desired corps and fleets and $25. NELSON is the only leader
available at the start
PRUSSIA: 80I, 3Gd, 17C, 5 depots, any desired corps, $18 and 9
manpower. The freikorps is not used in this scenario. Only
leaders BRUNSWICK and HOHENLOHE are available at the
start of the game. The Prussian player also sets up Saxony (the
Saxony corps with 8 Saxon I and 2 Saxon C).
RUSSIA: 75I, 5Gd, 10C, 2Ck, 6 depots, 49 ships, any desired
corps and fleets, and $37. All leaders except BARCLAY,
TORMASSOV and WITTGENSTEIN are available at the start of
the game No more than one corps (and no excess factors in
garrison there) may commence the game based at Corfu.
SPAIN: 1Gd, 41I, 6C, 2 depots, 57 ships, any desired corps and
fleets and $16. Only leaders BLAKE and CASTANOS are
available at the start of the game.
TURKEY: 35I, 7C, 2 depots, 22 ships, any desired corps and
fleets and $11. All feudal corps begin at full strength and may be
placed on the map if desired. No feudal corps may begin on the
map. See errata in 14.1.4.1.5. All leaders are available at the start
of the game. The Turkish player also sets up Syria (the Syria
corps with 5 Syrian I and 6 Syrian C).
14.4.5 CONTROL: The major powers control their home nations
plus those minor countries in the status (Free State or conquered)
indicated in the "1805" column of the MINOR COUNTRIES
CHART on the Game Card.
14.4.6 REINFORCEMENTS: The following leaders arrive in
the Army Reinforcement Step of January in the year indicated or
on any later Turn. France EUGENE (1806); Great Britain
44
WELLINGTON (1806) and MOORE (1807); Prussia.
BLUCHER (1806); Spain DE LAS CUESTA (1807).
14.4.7 SPECIAL RULES: There are no special rules in this
campaign game.
[ 14.5 ] THE 1812-1815 CAMPAIGN GAME: This campaign
game simulates the last half of the Napoleonic wars which saw
Napoleon's empire, initially at its greatest extent, collapse within
only three years. The players begin with French armies poised
along the Russian border. Russia, having just ended a war with
Turkey, lies ready to meet them. Wellington is ready to
commence his 1812 offensive in Spain. Austria and Prussia are
set to rise from the ashes. Players will discover that the qualities
of all except the British army have declined dramatically.
14.5.1 STATUS CARD SETUP:
14.5.1.1 POLITICAL STATUS: Use the (II) positions.
14.5.1.2 TIME: The game begins in June, 1812 and ends after the
December, 1815 Turn.
14.5.1.3 STARTING VICTORY POINTS:
Austria: 210.
France: 260.
Great Britain: 250.
Prussia: 180
Spain: 180
Russia: 205.
Turkey: 200
14.5.2 PLAYERS: If there are less than 7 players the following
division of major powers is recommended.
6 PLAYERS: Russia, France, Great Britain, Austria, Prussia,
Spain
5 PLAYERS: Russia, France. Great Britain, Austria, Prussia.
4 PLAYERS: Russia, France, Great Britain, Austria
3 PLAYERS: Russia, France, Great Britain
2 PLAYERS: Russia, France. For major powers (if
uncontrolled): At the start of the game, Turkey is a neutral UMP
with no controlling player, Spain is an active British UMP,
Prussia is an active Russian UMP, Austria is an active British
UMP, Great Britain is an active Russian UMP. UMPs of an UMP
become an UMP of the controlling major power
14.5.3 EXISTING WARS AND TREATIES:
14.5.3.1 WARS: France is at war with Great Britain, Spain and
Russia. Great Britain is also at war with the United States (see
8.2.1.2.2.2.2)
14.5.3.2 ALLIANCES: France is allied with Prussia. Great
Britain is allied with Spain.
14.5.3.3 PEACE CONDITIONS AND AGREEMENTS:
France has the Prussian I and Austrian I Corps on loan (see
French forces for strengths) under peace condition B4 through
September, 1812 for the Prussian corps and through January,
1813 for the Austrian corps. France has unconditional access
through Prussia under peace condition C 5 and Prussia has also
agreed to allow voluntary access to the French to garrison
Konigsberg. Austria has granted voluntary access for any period
to France that is the same as if peace condition C.5 applied.
Russia and Turkey just concluded a war and have an enforced
peace with each other prior to January, 1814. Peace condition C.8
has been applied to Austria. There is an enforced peace in effect
between France and Prussia until March, 1813 and between
France and Austria until July, 1813. France and Austria have a
royal marriage (peace condition B.5).
14.5.4 FORCES SETUP: The major power's forces begin with
these strengths
AUSTRIA: Apart from the I Corps under the control of the
French player (see French forces), the Austrian has 47I, 8Gd,5M,
18C, 1Fk, 9 depots, any desired corps (except the I corps) and $5.
Both insurrection corps begin at full strength, but are not on the
map. The Tyrol corps (at full strength) will be used only under the
conditions of 10.1.5 Only the SCHWARZENBERG leader is
available
FRANCE: France starts with $25. All French depots may be set
up anywhere within the French major power, Prussia and/or in
Spain.
A. Along The Russian Border:
(1) The Prussian I Corps with 10 Prussian I, 4 Prussian M and 1
Prussian C in the Konigsberg area
(2) The Austrian I Corps with 15 Austrian I and 1 Austrian C in
the Lemberg area.
(3) The Venetia corps with 8 Venetian I, the Lombardy corps
with 13 Lombard I, the Bavaria corps with 12 Bavarian I and 1C
corps with 5C and the EUGENE leader in the Thorn area.
(4) The Poland corps and the Poland C corps with 16 Polish I and
6 Polish C, the Saxony corps with 7 Saxon I and 1 Saxon C and
the Hanover corps with 8 Hanoverian I and 1 Hanoverian C and
the JEROME leader in an area or areas that are in or within one
area of the Warsaw area but not adjacent to the Russian border
(5) 4 corps, 1Gd corps, 2C corps and 1A corps with 53I, 15M,
20Gd, 19C and 12A and the NAPOLEON, DAVOUT, MURAT
and NEY leaders in an area or areas in or within 2 areas of the
Thorn area but not adjacent to the Russian border.
(6) 1 corps with 5I, 11M in the Posen province
(7) 1 corps with 5I, 20M in Brandenburg province
(8) 6M in Konigsberg
(9) 5 Polish I in Warsaw.
B. Forces in Spain:
(1) 1 corps with 16I, 9M and 3C and the SOUL T leader in
Andalusia province (in the Seville area and/or any Andalusian
areas not containing Spanish corps).
(2) 1 corps with 4I, 3M and 1C in any area or areas of New
Castile province
(3) 1 corps with 18I, 6M and 2C in Leon province (any area or
areas other than the Cuidad Rodrigo area).
(4) 1 corps with 16I, 11M and 3C in any area or areas of Valencia
and/or Aragon provinces.
(5) 1 corps with 12I, 8M and 1C in any area or areas of Catalonia
province.
(6) 1 corps with 10I, 12M and 2C in any area or areas of Galicia,
Leon (other than the Cuidad Rodrigo area) and/or Old Castile
provinces
C. Other Forces:
(1) 6M in Bayonne
(2) 40M and 201 set up as garrisons anywhere within the French
major power plus Prussia (other than in Prussian capitals).
(3) France begins with 25 ships and up to four fleets in or in sea
areas adjacent to any French home nation port or ports
(4) The Denmark corps with 5 Danish I is setup in the Hamburg
area. Two Danish I are set up in Copenhagen along with the
Denmark fleet and 1 Danish ship.
(5) The Venetia fleet with 3 Venetian ships is placed in Venice, if
used (see option 11.2)
(6) The French player also sets up the land forces of Hesse (the
Hesse corps with 2 Hessian I) and Naples (10 Neapolitan I, 2
Neapolitan C and may include one or both of the Naples corps)
anywhere in French-controlled territory
GREAT BRITAIN: Great Britain starts with $125. 5 depots may
be placed anywhere within the British major power.
A. 2 corps and 1C corps with 26I and 4C and the Portuguese
corps with 18 Portuguese I and 1 Portuguese C and the
WELLINGTON and BERESFORD leaders in any area or areas in
Portugal,
B. 1I each in Cuidad Rodrigo, Badajoz, Gibraltar, Malta, Corfu,
Alexandria and Cairo.
C. 2I in Palermo.
D. 2Gd, 18I and 12M anywhere in the British home nation
E. 120 ships and 7 fleets.
F, 3 Swedish corps and the Swedish fleet with 13I, 3C and 13
ships and the BERNADOTTE leader in any area or areas of
Sweden (less Finland, which is Russian-controlled).
45
PRUSSIA: Apart from the I Corps under the control of the
French player (see French forces), the Prussian has 201, 3Gd, 2C,
2 depots, $10 and 100 manpower. Only the BLUCHER leader is
available at the start of the game
RUSSIA: Russia starts with $15. 6 depots may be placed within
the Russian major power.
A. 30 ships and up to 3 fleets.
B. 5 corps, 1Gd corps, 3C corps and 1A corps with 10Gd, 46I,
10C and 10A, 2Ck and the BARCLAY and WITTGENSTEIN
leaders in or within one area of the Kovno area.
C. 2 corps and 1C corps with 22I and 4C, 1Ck and the
BAGRATION leader in or within one area of the Brest-Litovsk
area.
D. 2 corps and 1C corps with 18I and 4C and the TORMASSOV
leader in the 4-forage area in Polesia province.
E. 2 corps with 16I and 2C in any Moldavia province area.
F. 10I in Sveaborg.
G. 15I shared in any manner between Riga and Vitebsk
H. 8I in Kiev
I. 15M in Moscow and 10M in Smolensk
J. 25I distributed to any of the other cities within the Russian
major power (maximum of 5 per provincial capital or 2 per any
other city.
SPAIN: 101, 29M, 6C, 6 ships, any desired corps, 1 fleet and $4.
Only leaders DE LA CUESTA and CASTANOS are available at
the start of the game. Spanish forces may be setup anywhere
within Portugal, Majorca or Estremadura and/or Andalusia
(except for the Seville area) provinces. Up to one depot each may
be placed in an area with any Spanish corps or corps. Spain may
setup 30 Gr factors (no more than 5 per province) anywhere
within the Spanish home nation after the other players have
completed their setups.
TURKEY: 201, 5C, 2 depots, 12 ships. any desired corps (except
the Nizami-Cedid corps) and fleets and $3. All feudal corps begin
at full strength and may be placed on the map if desired. No
feudal corps may begin on the map. See errata in 14.1.4.1.5. All
leaders are available at the start of the game. The Turkish player
also sets up Syria (the Syria corps with 5 Syrian I and 5 Syrian C)
14.5.5 CONTROL: The major powers control their home nations
(minus any ceded provinces) plus those minor countries in the
status (Free State or conquered) indicated in the "1812" column of
the MINOR COUNTRIES CHART on the Game Card. Other
important items are.
AUSTRIA: Has lost Tyrol, Illyria and West Galicia provinces to
French control.
FRANCE:
A. Poland consists of Masovia, Posen, and West Galicia
provinces. If option 11.1 is not being used, consider these to be
French-controlled ceded provinces and convert all Polish corps
and army factors listed in the Forces Setup to French corps and
army factors (an additional French C corps is available and the
extra French I can be added to other corps in the same setup areas
or used as garrisons in those areas.
B. The Kingdom of Westphalia, the Kingdom of Bavaria and the
Confederation of the Rhine are in existence with all component
minor countries and ceded provinces If options 11.3-11.5 are not
being used, treat all of these territories as separate French-
controlled minor countries and ceded provinces (status of all
minor countries is on the MINOR COUNTRIES CHART on the
Game Card)
C. The Kingdom of Italy is in existence with all component
minor countries and the ceded Illyrian province. This means that
the Venetian ships and fleet are available. If option 11.2 is not
being used, treat all of these territories as separate French-
controlled territories and the Venetia fleet and ships are not used.
D. France controls only Naples of the Kingdom of the Two
Sicilies and controls only the Naples corps counters if option 11.7
is being used.
GREAT BRITAIN:
A. Britain controls Sicily (as a conquered minor) and controls the
Naples fleet counter (which currently has no ships), should Sicily
be made a minor Free State, if option 117 is being used.
B. Britain has controlled Portugal as a minor Free State for over
two years and, if used, option 12.3.2 applies to the Portuguese
morale value.
PRUSSIA: Has lost Magdeburg, Posen and Masovia as ceded
provinces to French control
RUSSIA: Controls Bessarabia as a ceded province and Finland as
a conquered minor country .
SPAIN: Controls its home nation.
TURKEY: Has lost Bessarabia as a ceded province to Russian
control
14.5.6 REINFORCEMENTS: The following leaders arrive in
the Army Reinforcement Step of the months and years indicated
or on any later Turn. Prussia YORCK (January, 1813); Russia.
ALEXANDER (July, 1812) and KUTUSOV (September. 1812).
The Prussian freikorps is available during the Levy Step of
March, 1813.
14.5.7 SPECIAL RULES:
A. The Turkish Nizami-Cedid corps is not used in this campaign
game
B. The French player cannot win this campaign game unless, at
some time in 1812, one or more French-controlled corps occupy
or besiege either Moscow or St. Petersburg and at some time in
the game occupy at least one of those cities or Russia surrenders
unconditionally to France sometime during the game. Gen 2/72
C. The French player holds captive the Spanish BLAKE leader
and 4 Spanish I. The British player holds captive 3 French l
[ 14.6 ] THE 1813-1815 CAMPAIGN GAME: This campaign
game simulates the final part of the Napoleonic wars as the
French armies, decimated in Spain and Russia, struggle
unsuccessfully to resist the overwhelming Allied forces. The
players begin with the French armies in Spain and Germany being
merely a shattered remnant of their former size. The Russian,
Prussian, British, and Spanish armies are massing against them
and both sides are actively seeking Austrian assistance. Only
Turkey remains uninvolved
14.6.1 STATUS CARD SETUP:
14.6.1.1 POLITICAL STATUS: Use the (III) positions.
14.6.1.2 TIME: The game begins in April 1813 and ends after the
December, 1815 Turn
14.6.1.3 STARTING VICTORY POINTS:
Austria: 240
France: 290.
Great Britain: 280
Prussia: 210.
Spain: 210.
Russia: 245.
Turkey: 230.
14.6.2 PLAYERS: If there are less than 7 players the following
division of major powers is recommended
6 PLAYERS: Russia, France, Great Britain, Austria, Prussia,
Spain, Prussia
5 PLAYERS: Russia, France, Great Britain, Austria, Prussia
4 PLAYERS: Russia, France, Great Britain, Austria.
3 PLAYERS: Russia, France. Great Britain
2 PLAYERS: Russia. France For major powers (if uncontrolled).
At the start of the game, Turkey is a neutral UMP with no
controlling player, Spain is an active British UMP, Prussia is an
active Russian UMP, Austria is an active British UMP, Great
Britain is an active Russian UMP UMPs of an UMP become an
UMP of the controlling major power
46
14.6.3 EXISTING WARS AND TREATIES:
14.6.3.1 WARS: France is at war with Great Britain, Prussia,
Russia and Spain Great Britain is also at war with the United
States (see 8.2.1.2.2.2.2).
14.6.3.2 ALLIANCES: Great Britain, Prussia and Russia are all
allied with each other. Great Britain is also allied with Spain
14.6.3.3 PEACE CONDITIONS: France has voluntary access
for the two Polish corps only through Austria under conditions
that are the same as if peace condition C5 applied except that
France may not garrison any Austrian cities. This voluntary
access agreement ends when both of the Polish corps leave
Austrian territory for French-controlled territory .Russia and
Turkey have an enforced peace with each other prior to January,
1814. France and Austria have an enforced peace with each other
prior to July, 1813. Peace condition C.8 has been applied to
Austria by France. France and Austria have a royal marriage
(peace condition B.5)
14.6.4 FORCES SETUP: The major power's forces begin with
these strengths.
AUSTRIA: 67I, 8Gd, 32M, 20C, 1Fk, 5 depots, any desired
corps and $20 Both insurrection corps begin at full strength, but
are not on the map The Tyrol corps (at full strength) will be used
only under the conditions of 10.15. Only the
SCHWARZENBERG leader is available.
FRANCE: France starts with $14. All French depots may be
setup anywhere within the French major power and/or in Spain.
A. In Germany:
(1) 2 corps and 1C corps with 22I, 5M and 3C and the EUGENE
leader in the Magdeburg area
(2) 1 corps with 7I and 8M and the NEY leader in the
northernmost area of Baden.
(3) 2 corps and 1Gd corps with 8I, 15M, 2Gd and 2C and the
NAPOLEON and SOULT leaders in the Mainz area
(4) 1 corps and 1C corps with 8I, 2M and 6C and the DAVOUT
leader in Hanover adjacent to the Hamburg area
(5) 1 corps with 9M in the Strasbourg area
(6) The Poland corps with 7 Polish I and 2 Polish C in the Olmutz
area
(7) 15I besieged in Danzig
(8) 3I besieged in Glogau.
(9) 1I besieged in Stettin.
(10) 1I besieged in Kustrin
(11) 3I in Erfurt.
B. In Spain:
(1) 1 corps with 17I, IM and 3C in any area or areas of Valencia
province.
(2) 1 corps with 5I, 3M and 1C in the Burgos area
(3) 2 corps with 26I, 4M and 4C in the Madrid area.
C. Other Forces:
(1) 1 corps and 2C corps with 10I, 15M and 10C in the Paris
and/or Lyon areas
(2) 8I and 6M divided in any manner between San Sebastian,
Barcelona, Gerona and/or Saragossa.
(3) 4I and 11M in any cities in the French home nation, to a
maximum of 3 factors per city
(4) 2 Naples corps with 12 Neapolitan I and 1 Neapolitan C and
the MURAT leader in the Naples area.
(5) 1 Danish corps with 9 Danish I and 1 Danish C in the
Christiana area
(6) The Danish fleet with 5 Danish I and I Danish ship in
Copenhagen
(7) France begins with 34 ships and up to 4 fleets
(8) The Venetia fleet with 4 Venetian ships in Venice, if used (see
option 11.2). The Venetia corps with 5 Venetian I is also placed
in Venice.
(9) The Baden corps with 1 Baden I. the Hanover corps with 1
Hanoverian I, the Hesse corps with 1 Hessian I, the Lombardy
corps with 5 Lombard I, and the Wurttemburg corps with I
Wurttemburg I may be placed anywhere in the French major
power.
GREAT BRITAIN: Great Britain starts with $85. 5 depots may
be placed anywhere within the British major power
A. 2 corps and 1C corps with 22I and 4C and the Portugal corps
with 14 Portuguese I and 1 Portuguese C and the WELLINGTON
and BERESFORD leaders in any area or areas of Portugal.
B. 1I each in Cuidad Rodrigo, Badajoz, Gibraltar, Malta, Corfu.
Alexandria and Cairo
C. 2I in Palermo
D. 5I and 8M anywhere in the British home nation
E. 122 ships and 7 fleets
F. 1 Swedish corps and the Swedish fleet with 4 Swedish I and 13
Swedish ships in the Stockholm area.
G. 2 Swedish corps with 12 Swedish I and 3 Swedish C and the
BERNADOTTE leader besieging Stettin
PRUSSIA: Prussia starts with $25 and 68 manpower 3 depots
may be placed anywhere within the Prussian major power or in
areas with Prussian corps in Saxony.
A. 1Gd corps and 1 corps with 1Gd, 6I, 2M and 2C and the
BLUCHER leader in the Dresden area
B. 2 corps with 5I, 1M and lC and the YORCK leader in the
Leipzig area.
C. 1 corps with 3I, 1M and 1C in the Wittenberg area.
D. 5I and 5M and 1Fk in Berlin
RUSSIA: Russia starts with $30. 5 depots may be placed
anywhere within the Russian or Prussian major powers or in areas
with Russian corps in Saxony
A. 36 ships and up to 3 fleets
B. 3 corps and 2C corps with 30I, 8C and 10M and the
BENNIGSEN leader anywhere in the Russian home nation.
C. 1Gd corps, 1 corps, 1C corps and 1A corps with 3Gd, 6I, 5C
and 6A and the ALEXANDER and TORMASSOV leaders in the
Dresden area
D. 2 corps and 1C corps with 8I and 3C and the
WITTGENSTEIN leader in the Leipzig area
E. 1 corps and 1C corps with 5I and 3C in the Wittenberg area
F. 1 corps with 7I and 1C and the BARCLAY leader in the Thorn
area.
G. 1 corps with 3I in the Mecklenburg area H. 1 corps with 4I
besieging Glogau.
I. 1 corps with 8I besieging Danzig.
J. 1 corps with 4I besieging Stettin
K. 1 corps with 4I besieging Kustrin.
L. 2I in Hamburg.
M. 3Ck in any area(s) containing any Russian or Prussian corps
SPAIN: 14I, 31M, 6C, 6 ships, 2 depots, any 6 corps, 1 fleet and
$10. Only leaders DE LA CUESTA and CASTANOS are
available at the start of the game. Spanish forces may be setup in
any area or areas within Portugal, Majorca, Galicia, Leon,
Andalusia and/or Estremadura. Spain may setup 30 Gr factors (no
more than 5 per province) anywhere within the Spanish home
nation after all other players have completed their setups.
TURKEY: 251, 6C, 2 depots, 14 ships, any desired corps (except
the Nizami-Cedid corps) and fleets and $10. All feudal corps
begin at full strength and may be placed on the map if desired. No
feudal corps may begin on the map. See errata in 14.1.4.1.5. All
leaders are available at the start of the game. The Turkish player
also sets up Syria (the Syria corps with 5 Syrian I and 4 Syrian C)
14.6.5 CONTROL: The major powers control their home nations
(minus any ceded provinces) plus those minor countries in the
state (Free State or conquered) indicated in the 1813 column of
the MINOR COUNTRIES CHART on the Game Card. Other
important items are:
AUSTRIA: Has lost Tyrol and Illyria provinces to French control
and West Galicia province to Russian control.
FRANCE:
47
A. Although Poland has disappeared. France still holds the Polish
loyalty marker. Use option 11.1 for this campaign game to keep
the Polish forces on the map.
B. The Kingdom of Westphalia is in existence with all component
minor countries and ceded province. If option 11.3 is not being
used, treat all of these territories as separate French-controlled
minor countries and a ceded province
C. The Kingdom of Bavaria is in existence, with Tyrol province
attached and is neutral. If option 11.4 is not being used, Bavaria
remains neutral, but Tyrol province is considered to be a French-
controlled ceded province.
D. The Confederation of the Rhine is in existence with all
component territories except for Bavaria and Saxony (neutral)
and Mecklenburg (controlled by Prussia). If option 115 is not
being used, treat all of the remaining components as separate
French-controlled minor countries and a ceded province
E. The Kingdom of Italy is in existence with all component minor
countries and the ceded Illyrian province. This means that the
Venetian ships and fleet are available. If option 11.2 is not being
used, treat all of these territories as separate French-controlled
minor countries and a ceded province
F. France controls only Naples of the Kingdom of the Two
Sicilies and controls only the Naples corps counters, if option
11.7 is being used.
GREAT BRITAIN:
A. Britain controls Sicily (as a conquered minor) and controls the
Naples fleet counter, should Sicily be made a minor Free State, if
option 11.7 is being used.
B. Britain has controlled Portugal as a minor Free State for over
two years and, if used, option 12.3.2 applies to Portuguese
morale.
PRUSSIA: Has lost Magdeburg province to French control and
Posen and Masovia provinces to Russian control
RUSSIA: Controls Bessarabia, Masovia, Posen and West Galicia
as ceded provinces
SPAIN: Controls its home nation.
TURKEY Has lost Bessarabia province to Russian control
14.6.6 REINFORCEMENTS: There are no special
reinforcements in this campaign game.
14.6.7 SPECIAL RULES:
A. The Turkish Nizami-Cedid corps is not used in this campaign.
B. Whenever Naples is not French controlled, the MURAT leader
is removed from the board. In an Army Reinforcement Step of a
Turn after Naples reverts to French control, MURAT is again
avail- able as a French leader.
C. In June 1813, the French receive 5Gd placed in the guard
corps if it is eligible.
[ 14.7 ] THE GRAND CAMPAIGN GAME: This campaign
game simulates the entire Napoleonic wars from 1805 onward. It
encompasses the full splendor and sorrow of Bonaparte's rise and
fall. The players relive the greatest and the most disastrous of the
campaigns that made Napoleonic legend a story to inspire
courage and fear.
14.7.1 STATUS CARD SETUP:
14.7.1.1 POLITICAL STATUS: Use the (1) positions
14.7.1.2 TIME: The game begins in January, 1805 and ends after
the December, 1815 Turn.
14.7.1.3 STARTING VICTORY POINTS: All major powers
begin with zero victory points
14.7.2 PLAYERS: If there are less than 7 players the following
division of major powers is recommended.
6 PLAYERS: Great Britain, France, Russia, Austria, Turkey,
Prussia
5 PLAYERS: Great Britain, France, Russia, Austria, Turkey
4 PLAYERS: Great Britain, France, Russia, Austria
3 PLAYERS: Great Britain, France, Russia.
2 PLAYERS: Great Britain, France. Use rules 14.2 and/or 14.3 to
gain control of all initially unselected major powers
14.7.3 EXISTING WARS AND TREATIES: Before any forces
are setup, major powers may announce pre-existing states of war.
This allows major powers in effect, to declare war before the
game begins. No political points are lost for doing so. Pre-
existing states of war may be announced only between major
powers. Players may wish to apply option 11.9.2. Neutral minor
countries may not be involved. No alliances are in effect and no
peace conditions apply.
14.7.4 FORCES SETUP: The major power's forces begin with
these strengths
AUSTRIA: 75I. 7Gd.15C, 7 depots, any desired corps and $33.
Both insurrection corps begin at full strength but may not be setup
on the map. The Tyrol corps will be used only under the
conditions of 10.1.5. All leaders except SCHWARZENBERG are
available at the start of the game
FRANCE: 135I. 5Gd. 17C, any desired corps and fleets, 4
depots, 49 ships and $45. All leaders except EUGENE and
JEROME are available at the start of the game. The French player
also sets up Holland (the Holland corps and the Holland fleet with
4I, 1C and 15 ships) and the Cisapline Republic (the Lombardy
corps with 11I, 1C). See [11.8] Cisapline Republic. MLB
GREAT BRITAIN: 1Gd.19I, 4C, 2 depots. 100 ships, any
desired corps and fleets and $25. NELSON is the only leader
available at the start. If using rule 5.3.1 LEADER MINIMUMS,
then also add Generic Leader 221D
PRUSSIA: 80I, 3Gd, 17C, 5 depots, any desired corps, $18 and 9
manpower. Only leaders BRUNSWICK and HOHENLOHE are
available at the start of the game. The Prussian player also sets up
Saxony (the Saxony corps with 8 Saxon I and 2 Saxon C).
RUSSIA: 75I, 5Gd, 10C, 2Ck, 6 depots, 49 ships, any desired
corps and fleets, and $37. All leaders except BARCLAY,
TORMASSOV and WITTGENSTEIN are available at the start of
15.0 PLAYER NOTES
The following notes apply primarily to campaign games
[ 15.1 ] AUSTRIA
Like Prussia, Austria holds a central position on the map
Surrounded by Russia, Turkey, Prussia and France, it requires a
true Metternich to successfully negotiate the rocky path of "real
politik"
First, attempt to negotiate a nonaggression pact with Russia and
Turkey Russia should be easier than Turkey because, with so
many Turkish provinces near the Austrian border, the Turkish
player may find a war to his advantage However, Turkey may
only want North Africa and may desire peace in the Balkans to
facilitate a Franco- Austrian conflict
A pact with Prussia could be crucial to counter an aggressive
French player Austria will eventually have to face the French
army so, if Austria finds itself falling behind in the territorial
scrabble for minor countries, face that war sooner rather than
later. This means that the more friends Austria has, the better.
While the French are strong they are not invincible. If Austria can
ally early with Great Britain and Prussia, the alliance will have
superior strength.
If Austria finds itself at war with Turkey, the insurrection corps
can prove to be invaluable. It is important to place these corps
down at the correct time Let the first few corps past and only
when Turkey is moving its last few, place the insurrection corps
on the map, forcing a battle and cutting supply lines. Turkey's
48
the game. No more than one corps may commence the game
based at Corfu (and no excess factors in garrison there).
SPAIN: 1Gd, 41I, 6C, 2 depots, 57 ships, any desired corps and
fleets and $16. Only leaders BLAKE and CASTANOS are
available at the start of the game. The Spanish controls Tuscany
as a conquered minor. See [11.8] Cisapline Republic. MLB
TURKEY: 35I, 7C, 2 depots, 22 ships, any desired corps and
fleets and $11. All feudal corps begin at full strength and may be
placed on the map if desired. No feudal corps may begin on the
map. See errata in 14.1.4.1.5. All leaders are available at the start
of the game, except MUHAMMAD ALI MLB. The Turkish
player also sets up Syria (the Syria corps with 5 Syrian I and 6
Syrian C).
14.7.5 CONTROL: The major powers control their home nations
plus those minor countries in the status indicated (Free State or
conquered) in the 1805 column of the MINOR COUNTRIES
CHART on the Game Card.
14.7.6 REINFORCEMENTS: The following leaders arrive in
the Army Reinforcement Step of January in the year indicated or
on any later Turn. Austria: SCHWARZENBERG (1810); France:
EUGENE (1806) and JEROME (1808); Great Britain:
WELLINGTON (1806), MOORE (1807) and BERESFORD
(1808); Prussia. BLUCHER (1807 MLB) and YORCK (1813);
Russia. BARCLAY (1810), TORMASSOV (1811), and
WITTGENSTEIN (1812); Spain: DE LAS CUESTA (1807);
Turkey/Egypt: MUHAMMAD ALI (1805) MLB as soon as
Egypt is conquered by Turkey (any time after Dec 1804). The
Austrian freikorps is available during the Levy Step of March,
1809 and the Prussian freikorps is available during the Levy Step
of March, 1813. The BERNADOTTE leader changes from being
a French to a Swedish leader in August, 1810. The following
leaders are removed (even if besieged) in the Army
Reinforcement Step of the month and year indicated and cannot
be brought on thereafter. France: MASSENA (May 1811); Russia
KUTUSOV (January 1813). MLB & DB
14.7.7 SPECIAL RULES: There are no special rules in this
campaign game
first few corps should not be able to take part in the battle (unless
adjacent) and you will be fighting on more even terms At the very
least, the threat from off-map insurrection corps should make
Turkey cautious when crossing the Austrian border. In the 1812
and 1813 campaign games, Austria's objective has to be the
destruction of France. Only when France is brought down to size
can Austria pursue its own plans for victory.
[ 15.2 ] FRANCE
France is the strongest power in Europe. Better troops, faster
movement, better and more leaders and a buoyant economy make
France a very powerful opponent. However it is not unbeatable,
especially if overstretched and faced by a powerful, well-financed
coalition
Do not pressure Austria or Prussia too much, especially in the
early phases of games starting in 1805, as this may create a
coalition against France and, early in the game, France is weaker
than a combined Austria/Prussia coalition. Try to weaken a
possible Austria/Prussia coalition, perhaps by favoring one of
them in the division of minor countries or by encouraging Turkey
or Russia to attack one of them. "Divide and conquer" should be
the basis of French diplomacy in all campaign games.
Control of Italy could cause the greatest amount of friction in
games starting in 1805. With Russia controlling Corfu, every
major power except Prussia has the capacity to claim some part of
Italy. Being too forceful with French demands could prove
disastrous. On the other hand, if the other major powers squabble
over Italy, this is definitely to the French advantage, so encourage
this by offering morsels to potential allies
France has a lot of victory points to gain so don't be frivolous in
declarations of war. If possible, get the other major powers to
declare war on France. With better French morale and leadership,
France should win at least 60% of the battles and thus gain more
political points than are lost. Remember, it is better to tackle a
large army with low morale than a small army with high morale
since they are easier to beat and winning battles means gaining
pursuits and victory points (via political points) and that is what
the campaign game is all about. If France does declare war, try to
have the forces available to win that war fast!
In the 1812 campaign game, France faces a tough situation.
Moscow is a long way from Poland and a powerful Austria and
Prussia (and probably Turkey) are just waiting to draw sabers.
First, take Moscow or St Petersburg. Move the two corps from
central Prussia into Russia. Even though they are mostly militia,
they are great for absorbing battle and attrition losses. Guard
Warsaw while marching east to Moscow or St Petersburg. Leave
at least one French infantry corps plus the Poles (who can receive
reinforcements) and Davout to defeat Tormassov. If the Russians
have Bagration's force all in one area, strike in the first Turn!
Always leave a couple of corps in areas which can be used to
build depots and use money for supply for as long as possible. If
Poland is lost, French supply lines will extend back to
Mecklenburg or Saxony and these are difficult to defend, even
against roving cossacks. As soon as Moscow or St Petersburg
falls, get out of Russia, pronto! Hopefully, the Russians will be
too crippled to greatly hinder the withdrawal
Get out of Spain! Historically, Napoleon refused to give up any of
his empire and so lost the lot. If Prussia and Austria choose to
fight a winter campaign, every factor will be needed to hold Italy
and Germany However, France has a huge force in Spain and if
the British or Spanish follow too closely, crush them!
If things are going well, especially in the Grand Campaign Game,
France may wish to impose a "continental system" on the rest of
Europe by denying trade money to Great Britain, Although this
will not bring the British lion to its knees, as Napoleon hoped, it
can slow them down and deny them subsidy money to finance
France's continental opponents. Peace condition B.6 allows this to
be imposed on major powers that lose wars to France and, if
France has a decent money surplus, other major powers may be
persuaded not to trade with Britain by offering them cash
subsidies equal to lost trade if they do not trade with Great
Britain. Perhaps the most powerful weapon at France's disposal is
the ability to say when France moves in the Land Phase sequence.
This allows France to plan "double moves" (move last in one
Turn, then first in the next Turn). This can mean attacking an
enemy that was eight areas away before that enemy can react. A
favorite tactic of one of our play testers was to move last in the
last month before an Economic Phase and occupy an enemy
capital This forces that major power to rely on British charity for
the finances to continue a war.
When the inevitable coalition forms against France, remember
Napoleon's words "I would rather fight allies than be one of
them"
[ 15.3 ] GREAT BRITAIN
Correct play of Great Britain, more so than that of any other
major power, requires the process of maximizing the strengths of
the British position and minimizing , its weaknesses. This is so
because those strengths and weaknesses I are more pronounced
than for other powers.
Precisely because enemy access to Great Britain is restricted by
the English Channel and policed by the overwhelmingly powerful
British navy, the British player need never retain any major troop
numbers at home Almost the entire army can be used overseas.
However, it must be said that that army will always be rather
small' and so where and when it will be committed should be
chosen with caution. Likely places include the islands of the
Mediterranean, North Africa, Spain, Scandinavia, Russia (to
threaten St. Petersburg and/or weaken the Russian navy), the
Dardanelles and East Prussia where, because of their wealth, the
British forces can use regular supply while other armies may
49
suffer from foraging for sup- ply Of course, as circumstances
develop, the better places for commitment will present
themselves.
Almost never commit British armies in fragments, keep them
together so as to minimize the risk of having them destroyed
piecemeal and to gain the maximum benefit from Wellington's
superior leadership abilities.
Proper use of money is central to proper British play. Simply
giving it to whoever begs loudly will not do. Decide who Great
Britain's long-term enemies will be (usually France) and dole out
money in small increments to those major powers which appear
to be staunchly opposed to those enemies. The establishment of a
"slush fund" for the purchase of military and political favors from
these and other major powers can also prove useful.
It is seldom worth denying trade with America. The loss of
colonial trade resulting from a war with the United States is worth
more to Great Britain than the few money points denied to
enemies. However, as such a loss may really hurt financially
weak countries at crucial moments, this should not be ignored. A
final warning about trading-it does not do to have too many
enemies, and consequently, too few trading partners at any one
time.
Build up the army as evenly as possible, concentrating on regular
cavalry and infantry. The British army has unequaled quality
regular infantry but lacks size. Most militia is better used for
home garrisons than in the field diluting the high British morale.
Always maintain a naval superiority over the combined navies of
any two enemies or potential enemies
[ 15.4 ] PRUSSIA
Prussia, like Austria, is in a central position and, in a campaign
game starting in 1805, has a large high-quality army. Prussia has
access to many minor neutrals, but a lack of political acumen
could find Prussia embroiled in a losing war. Until BLUCHER
arrives in 1806, Prussia has very poor leadership and unless a
good opportunity presents itself, Prussia should try not to
antagonize its neighbors early. Form an alliance with Austria,
Russia and/or Great Britain. This would have the major benefit of
support in a defensive war. Preserve the large army, especially the
cavalry which is expensive to buy.
The toughest question in the opening stages of the game is
whether to create a Polish Free State. If done, Prussia could gain
large numbers of high quality Polish troops However, Austria
and/or Russia could attack and conquer the Prussian Polish
provinces that would otherwise be difficult to obtain.
Mecklenburg, Hesse, Saxony, and Duchies are in the Prussian
sphere of influence, with Hanover and Denmark less so but still
attainable. With British help, maybe even Sweden could be taken.
In the 1812 and 1813 campaign games, Prussia must help with the
French downfall Use the saved up manpower (as regular infantry
if Great Britain will provide the necessary money) on the Turn
that Prussia attacks.
[ 15.5 ] RUSSIA
Russia has great defensive strength, due mainly to its edge-of-the-
map position. This position, coupled with its great size, poor
forage values and cossacks, make it difficult for other major
powers to force Russia to peace terms.
A major problem for Russia is the lack of adjacent neutral minor
countries. Neutral minor countries are the coinage of diplomacy
and provide room for easy expansion. Russia should gain
Scandinavia through conquest or an arrangement with other
interested powers and the Polish Free State question can be used
as a lever in diplomacy with Prussia or Austria. Russia has a large
army of good quality, allowing it to pick all the combat options
with confidence, particularly the "Defend" option, as this
increases Russian morale. Russia also has decent leaders, an
artillery corps and a good basic economy.
Russia will often be called upon to intervene in Central Europe
and must negotiate useful gains in these wars. A Turkish war can
only be undertaken with good planning and powerful forces and
can be made easier with help from an ally. Turkey is especially
dangerous to Russia early in campaign games starting in 1805 or
anytime that Turkey has the help of a powerful ally.
Corfu has strategic advantages that belie its seeming
insignificance. Using sea supply from the Baltic, reinforcement
corps and factors can allow rapid expansion into Italy and North
Africa.
The last question is where to place the Russian navy. Two fleets
in the Baltic and one in Corfu appears to be the best option at the
start of a campaign game starting in 1805, but may be modified
by the results of Russian diplomacy.
In the 1812 campaign game, retreat before Le Grande Armee.
Keep a large force south of the Pripet Marshes to threaten to cut
supply behind the French advance to Moscow. Keep cossacks
busy in the French rear areas to force detachments to guard
French supply lines. Fight for control of St Petersburg and
Moscow and try to get support from Turkey. With superior play,
the French can be sent reeling back to Poland with the specter of
defeat haunting their every faltering step.
[ 15.6 ] SPAIN
Spain's advantage lies in her large fleet, therefore an entente with
France and/or Great Britain (both of whom could find Spain a
useful ally) could provide several opportunities to expand into
North Africa and Italy. In the early stages of campaign games
starting in 1805, with some diplomacy, Spain could get Naples,
some of North Africa and Portugal. Further minor countries may
need to be decided by force of arms.
Spanish guerrillas can be used as an excellent deterrent to an
attack on the Spanish home nation. They can cut supply lines and
even amalgamate to attack isolated factors Spain must still leave
some regular forces to defend the homeland and to prevent
occupation of all provincial capitals.
In the 1812 and 1813 campaign games, Spain is, of course, at war
with France and the French may wish peace. Great Britain and
Spain are natural allies in these games and Spain should bargain
for a good settlement, if any is made. France may need peace
much more than Spain.
[ 15,7] TURKEY
Turkey has possibly the most interesting and challenging set of
tasks of all the seven major powers. It bas virtually unlimited
amounts of feudal (basically militia) infantry and cavalry with
which it can relentlessly assault an enemy, but with such low
morale, Turkey will not win very many battles.
When in combat, pick one of the high risk-high yield options such
as outflank, assault, cordon or defend, when fighting an opponent
with high morale (such as the French or British) If "Echelon" or
"Probe" is picked, inferior Turkish morale will probably cost the
combat, even though the opponent's pursuit will not be good (as
he will have lost a lot of morale as well). Choosing the indicated
options could lead to spectacular failures but, if the opponent is
outguessed, it could mean a stunning victory where a (usually)
superior Turkish cavalry force (plus cavalry leader) can mean a
relentless pursuit. When in combat, ensure that there is a feudal
cavalry corps to take pursuit losses if the battle is lost. One
combat advantage Turkey does have is that feudal infantry is not
counted as militia for purposes of taking losses once having lost
2.0 morale. Turkey can continue taking losses from feudal
infantry regardless of total morale loss.
In the early stages of campaign games starting in 1805,
concentrate on carving out a North African empire and try
gaining a foothold in Italy. In Italy, Turkey can be opposed by
France, Austria, Spain, Russia and/or Great Britain, so don't get
too greedy. Austria and Russia will be wary of a strong Turkish
strategic position and, to avoid antagonizing them, do not set up
corps on their borders. An early pro-Austrian stance could be to
your advantage as it allows Austria greater freedom to fight the
French (which could debilitate both of them).
In the 1812 and 1813 campaign games, an initial anti-French
stance is essential to bring her down to size with the degree of
commitment to her downfall dependent on the number of victory
points that the French player bid for France
[ 15.8 ] GENERAL HINTS
Like most games involving a diplomatic element, campaign
games of EMPIRES IN ARMS require players to be constantly
negotiating among themselves. Players should realize that even
50
the shorter campaign games are long enough for many political
changes and re-alignments to occur and today's enemy can be
tomorrow's ally. Try to be as truthful as possible in dealing with
other players and faithful in honoring informal agreements.
Players can appreciate a skillful "double-cross" when it is
decisive in deciding the outcome of a game, but gratuitous "stabs
in the back" (especially early in a campaign game) that gain only
a few political points accomplish little except to gain everyone's
distrust and a desire for "revenge" among the other players that
can have disastrous long-term consequences. Imposing a "harsh"
peace on a current enemy (i.e., removing the best leader, corps
and fleets, the best and richest provinces, etc) can leave that
enemy so weak that other major powers can declare war on the
weakened major power to gain "easy" political points (known as
"shooting cripples") and the weakened major power will be
useless as a potential needed ally in some later war.
Have goals and a general plan for achieving them. Do not make
alliances lightly! Alliances that do not last can cost political
points (and victory points) when they have to be broken When
asking for help in negotiations have something favorable to offer
in return for the desired help. This could take the form of a loan
or subsidy, ceding territory that the other player wants, offering
help in future projects or anything else that an imaginative mind
can conjure. For example. France or Britain could offer to send a
corps and a good leader to which a large number of Spanish
corps (Spain lacks good leaders for large armies) without leaders
could be attached This offer is favorable to Spain as it increases
Spain's chances for winning battles and political points while it is
favorable to the offering major power as it enables France or
Britain to risk few factors in the campaign on that front and
leaves most of their strength free for use elsewhere. Always offer
something, but try to offer no more than is absolutely necessary
Players with a reputation for upholding and following through on
agreements will find that their negotiating position is far stronger
than that of more erratic players In this game, friends can be very
important and many of the game's rules favor coalition activities.
A campaign game is won or lost based on the accumulation of
victory points. Gaining large numbers of victory points depends
on gaining political points and keeping an overall high position on
the POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY. It is not necessary to win
every war and/or battle to win the game. What is important is not
getting into situations where long stretches of time are spent in
the Fiasco and/or Instability Zone with resultant low gains in
victory points. In the long run, it is better to realize that a situation
is hopeless, surrender early enough to get the most favorable
peace terms possible and accept a few Economic Phases with low
victory points rather than to "fight to the end" and be reduced to a
military "basket case" lacking the strength to avoid further
surrenders, to exert diplomatic leverage or to later rapidly regain
the lost political points
Study the number of victory points required for the major powers
to win a game and figure what is called for in terms of victory
points per Victory Points Step. For example, in an 1805-1807
campaign game, Austria needs 110 victory points to win This is
an average of a little over 9 victory points per Victory Points
Step. If 10 victory points is bid for and gains control of Austria,
this increases the average needed to 10 victory points per Victory
Paints Step. Is a bid this high or even higher warranted to gain
control of Austria ? Once the need is established, what plan gives
the best chance of accumulating the required total of victory
points ?
Study the POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY. There are definitely
times when securing alliances, making peace, ceding minor
countries, economically manipulating, etc. are most advantageous
in minimizing or maximizing political/victory point losses and
gains. For example, if a major power's political status marker is
in the Dominant Zone box with -2 PSA and 11 victory points,
making an alliance (+I, political points) just before an Economic
Phase is not very productive. The alliance maker's political status
marker would be advanced into the -3PSA and 11 victory points
box so that no additional victory points would be gained from the
alliance and the Political Status Adjustment Step will see the
marker adjusted into the same box where it would have been if no
alliance had been mode. In a case like this, waiting for a more
favorable moment to make the alliance makes good sense. Since
political points are lost to declare war, the ideal war is a short and
successful one; preferably declared just after an Economic Phase
and concluded before the next Economic Phase. The political
points dropped to declare a war can cost a considerable number of
victory points over the course of a long war, even if eventually
victorious. Of course winning some big battles can counteract the
initial political point drop, but can always winning be assured?
Tricks of the Trade: As with most games there are some helpful
"tricks" that can come in handy during the course of a game A
few to keep in mind are as follows.
1. Especially during a Grand Campaign Game, there are periods
of peace when a major power may safely cut expenses by getting
corps and depots and their maintenance costs off the map Corps
without cavalry can be put into garrison until needed later and
feudal and insurrection corps can stand down. Remaining corps
can be spread out into richer (higher forage value) areas where
(since they are not moving) they can safely forage without risking
forage losses. As war approaches new depots can be placed where
needed, corps massed where needed, new corps created from
garrisons and, if necessary, new regular cavalry factors built in
time for the start of hostilities
2. A depot garrison can participate in a field combat with friendly
corps in its area. The up to 10 extra factors garrisoning a depot
can be a useful increment in force to a defending army without
adding another corps that could reduce a commander's tactical
rating.
16.0 GLOSSARY
ALLIES - Major powers that have formally made an alliance (sec
4.5) are allies Major powers must be allies in order to use
combined movement together (see 4.9-this is also required to
transport another major power's corps-see 6.2.5), to declare war if
in the same area as an ally that is attacked (see 7.3.8.3), to provide
(with permission) depot supply to another major power (see
7.4.2.2), to be used to trace sea supply for another major power
(see 7.4.3.1), to loan money (see 8.3), to cede territory to each
other during a Ceding Step (see 8.8.2) or to grant voluntary access
(if option 11.8 is used). Major powers may not re-ally until at
least 12 months after breaking an earlier alliance (see 4.5.3). A
major power may only run a neutral minor country at war with an
ally if there are no non-allies that can or wish to run it (see 4.6).
BLACK SEA - Sea north of Constantinople surrounded by the
Turkish and Russian coasts.
BREAKING - A side's total morale loss in a combat equals or
exceeds its final morale level at the start of the combat.
CAVALRY - Regular cavalry, feudal cavalry and cossacks and
freikorps.
CEDED PROVINCE - Province given by one major power to a
second as part of a peace settlement or such a province that has
since been reconquered by another major power or powers that
are not the initial owning major power. If reconquered by the
initial owning major power it is no longer considered a ceded
province but becomes an unceded province.
CITY GARRISON CAPACITY - Maximum capacity of army
factors (in corps and/or garrisons) being five times the city supply
value (the number of spires in the city picture).
CITY SIEGE VALUE - Strength of city against siege assault
(equals the number of fleches in the city picture).
CITY SUPPLY VALUE - Number of spires in the city is the
supply value used for supplying besieged corps or garrisons.
COMBAT LOSSES - Are losses due to field combats, limited
field combats, siege combats, trivial combats pursuits and/or
surrenders.
CONTROLLED (FRIENDLY) CITY/PORT - A controlled
city/port is any vacant city/port in that major power's territory, or
any city/port in which that major power has factors, whether
besieged or not.
51
3. If an army contains militia, do not mass it all in one corps, but
spread it over as many corps as possible. Then, if foraging losses
occur, as many as possible can be militia factors
4. For security, large garrisons are often left in home nation cities,
especially in capitals and border cities If Method One for
determining final morale (see 7.5.2.6.1) is used, a garrison of 11-
20 factors that contains all regular infantry plus I militia factor
has the same final morale as a garrison of the same size that
contains all 3.0 morale value regular infantry. This is also true for
garrisons of 21 or more factors with 2 militia factors. This can
save a few bucks in the creation of these large garrisons.
5. If Method One for determining final morale (see 7.5.2.6.1) is
used. the inclusion of a cossack or freikorps or two with a large
army should have no effect on final morale, but do provide
cavalry factors for loss if the army breaks and/or is pursued.
6. If option 12.3.4 is used and a guard or grenadier corps is
available, carefully study the situation after every combat round.
Sometimes committing the guard can guarantee that an enemy
will break on the next combat round where this would not be sure
without the guard. In other cases, if it is certain or nearly certain
that the army with the guard will break on the next combat round,
using the guard may cause greater morale loss to the victor and
reduce their pursuit class
CONTROLLED MINOR COUNTRY - A minor country which
is either a minor Free State or conquered minor country,
controlled by a major power.
CONTROLLED PROVINCE - A currently unceded home
province or province currently ceded to that major power unless
that province's capital city is occupied by unbesieged enemy
factors. This affects collection of taxation and manpower and the
placement of cossacks, freikorps and feudal forces.
CONQUERED MINOR COUNTRY - A minor country
controlled by a major power that is not a minor Free State. This is
indicated by the presence of a conquered control flag and allows
the collection of basic tax and manpower by the controlling major
power. Conquered minor countries do not have forces nor may
they build any.
CORPS - Large land unit counters. NOTE. Corps on the map
must have at least one army factor.
CORPS INTRINSIC RATINGS - Each nationality has an
intrinsic strategic and tactical rating for its corps. This rating is
used when no leaders are present, for all strategic and tactical
purposes. If option 12.3.7.1 is used, all corps are considered to
have an unprinted intrinsic tactical maximum rating of' '1'.
DISTRICT - A major named component of a large minor
country.
FIELD FORCES - Land forces excluding guerrillas (unless
attacking) not in a city or port.
FLEET - Large naval unit counter. NOTE: Fleets on the map
must have at least one ship.
FORTRESS - Any city with fleches in its picture.
GARRISONS - Regular infantry, cossack, freikorps, guerrilla or
militia factors which are not pan of a corps, and are placed in a
city, port or on a depot.
HOME NATION - Austria, France, Great Britain, Prussia,
Russia, Spain or Turkey as defined by the major power borders,
less any ceded provinces.
INFANTRY - Regular infantry, militia, guerrillas, feudal infantry
and guard infantry.
MAJOR POWER - Home nation plus controlled minor countries
plus provinces ceded to that home nation.
MINOR FREE STATE - Minor country controlled by a major
power which has been declared a minor Free State (indicated by
the Free State control flag). Allows collection of double tax and
manpower which can only be used for forces of the minor Free
State.
MONEY - The game's currency is in the form of "money points,"
denoted by a dollar sign ("$").
NEUTRAL MINOR COUNTRIES - All minor countries not
under the control of any of the major powers.
PEACE CONDITION OR PEACE TERM - Used
interchangeably. These are the items from lists "A," "B," or "C"
on the VICTORY CONDITIONS CHART on the Game Card
used when making a conditional or unconditional peace (see 4.4).
PHASING - The "phasing" player, corps, forces, etc. terminology
refers to the player or forces of that major power currently per-
forming its portion of a Turn, phase or step. All other players and
forces are defined to be "non-phasing" at that time.
PORT ADJACENT TO SEA AREA - A sea area is adjacent to
a port if it is touched at all by that port's blockade box.
PROVINCE - A major named component part of a major
power's home nation.
REGULAR CAVALRY - Cavalry that is not cossacks, freikorps
or feudal cavalry.
REGULAR INFANTRY - Infantry that is not militia, guerrillas,
feudal infantry or guard. Turkish Janissaries are regular infantry.
SEA SUPPLY - Supply chain between two unblockaded ports, at
least one containing one or more friendly fleets and both
containing a depot.
17.0 DESIGNER'S NOTES
This game started out many years ago as a divisional level game
covering Europe only. Its development into its current format was
an evolutionary rather than a revolutionary process. The greatest
change was the institution of a corps level game. We wanted
players to represent the commanders-in-chief of their respective
countries. The use of corps (and equivalents) would best
accomplish this. The leaders included in the game are only those
that commanded armies during the Napoleonic years. Thus
excellent leaders such as Lannes and Hill are not included as they
were only single corps commanders. We feel the three most
innovative sections of our game are:
[ 17.1 ] LAND COMBAT SYSTEM: This unique system allows
each major power to forge an empire not only by superior
movement (and we recommend the optional regular supply rule
be used to force players to maneuver carefully--see 12.3.1) but
also by outthinking your opponent. Although the land combat
system is involved, the fact that players' futures depend on their
chit choice means that it is never dull. Further, the doing away
with an odds system eliminates the glitch of gamers trying to find
that extra factor to gain that somehow mystical 3-1. Every factor
counts unless that factor reduces your morale that 0.1 which
means the difference between breaking or not. The combination
of all these influences makes no two combats alike and all
campaigns memorable.
[ 17.2 ]THE POLITICAL SYSTEM: Nearly all so-called
political games degenerate into, "How about you and I crush
18.0 RULE CONSOLIDATOR’S NOTES
All changes have been marked with different color text.
 Official errata are marked in green. The General
number and edition, ie. Gen 23/4, was placed after each
such addition or change.
 Rules clarifications are marked in blue. These are our
explanation of rules that can be interpreted many
different ways. These are mostly taken from the
52
SEIGE - Garrisons or corps in a city/port with an enemy corps
placed on top.
SUPPLY SOURCE - Any unbesieged controlled city in a home
nation or in a controlled minor country in which there is also a
depot in the surrounding area.
SURRENDER OF TROOPS - These factors and leaders are
kept as prisoners by the capturing major power and are returned
when peace with that major power is reached as ordinary
reinforcements in the next Reinforcement Phase.
VALID SUPPLY CHAIN - A valid supply chain is a connected
series of depots of one major power, with at most one intervening
area between them, back to a supply source of that major power.
No area in a valid supply chain, including the intervals between
depots, may contain any unbesieged enemy corps, cossack,
freikorps, guerrillas or garrison unless it also contains an
unbesieged friendly corps or garrison or unbesieged allied corps
or garrison. A valid supply chain may not be traced across sea
areas unless by sea supply, but may be traced across a crossing
arrow unless the surrounding sea area contains in enemy fleet.
WINTER - December, January, and February Turns.
WINTER ZONE - All land areas on the map excluding those in
Morocco, Algeria, Tunisia, Tripolitania, Cyrenaica, Egypt,
Palestine, Corfu, Cyprus, Rhodes, Crete, Malta, and Majorca.
Prussia?" EMPIRES IN ARMS quantifies all the important
elements of Napoleonic politics and the status of one major power
with respect to another may require responsibilities (as in an
alliance) or commitments (as in open warfare). The political
decisions relating to allies and enemies must not be made lightly.
A fickle player will quickly find himself in the bottom half of the
Political Status Display and thus collecting few victory points.
[ 17.3] UNCONTROLLED MAJOR POWERS (UMPS): This
is perhaps the most important rule of the game. We realize that
arranging 7 wargamers to play a long game may be difficult;
therefore it is important that UMPs play their historical
significance. The NATURAL ALLIANCE TABLE is a method
of addressing the historical influences of one major power on
another. If a player gains control of an UMP that he should not,
he has only a limited potential to exploit that UMP before losing
control. An inactive UMP cannot be used offensively and an
active UMP can only lose a limited number of factors
We hope you enjoy this game and find that EMPIRES IN ARMS
provides the resources to make and break empires in true
Napoleonic tradition.
Harry Rowland
Greg Pinder
Ambiguous Rules pdf by Tom Smith (TS) and from
my own explanations.
 Optional rules hare marked in red. They have been
taken from a variety of sources included here below:
-MLB Rules v2.76 (marked MLB)
-Turkish variants from General 29/5, ie. Gen 29/5
-Further (House) Rules for EIA by by Mustafa Ünlü
(marked MU)
-David Bofinger (marked DB)
-EIA House rules from a Finnish Group (FIN)
-from me, Jason Johns (marked JJ)
-and a couple I forgot to note (unmarked).

53